JP2020018909A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine allowing an easy adjustment of an operation position of an operator to the original operation position.SOLUTION: A game machine allows a player to recognize a displacement position of an operator with a predetermined member as a reference. Therefore, after the operator is adjusted to a displacement position where shooting strength of game balls becomes desired shooting strength, for example, when a game is interrupted and even if the displacement position of the operator is returned to an initial position, the player can adjust (return) the displacement position of the operator to an original displacement position (i.e., the displacement position before the game was interrupted) with the predetermined member as the reference. Consequently, the displacement position of the operator can be easily adjusted to the original displacement position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a handle rotating portion is rotatably attached to a handle base, and the firing intensity of a ball is adjusted in accordance with a rotating operation amount of the handle rotating portion. In addition, when the desired firing strength is obtained by the turning operation of the handle turning unit, the turning of the handle turning unit is fixed to maintain the firing intensity and reduce the fatigue of the player. Some structures have

JP 2012-005759 A

  An urging force by an urging spring is applied to the operation element (handle rotating portion), and when the player releases his / her hand, the operation position of the operation element returns to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when the game is interrupted, it is difficult to adjust the operation position of the operating element to the original operation position before the interruption of the game.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily adjust an operation position of an operation element to an original operation position.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation device operated by a player, and the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the operation device. The operating device has an operator that has a held portion held by the player on one side and has the other side supported so that the held portion can be slidably displaced, and a sliding displacement of the held portion of the operator. An interlocking displacing unit formed so as to be displaceable interlockingly with, and interlocking canceling means for canceling the interlocking displacing unit to be displaced in interlocking with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, The firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of slide displacement of the held portion, the player is configured to be able to recognize the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion with reference to the interlocking displacement portion, and the operating element is , The launching intensity of the game ball The held portion is formed so as to be displaceable in a second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjustment, and the interlocking release means is configured such that the held portion of the operation element is displaced in the second direction. Thereby, the interlocking displacement portion is formed so as to be released from being displaced in conjunction with the operation element.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction in which the held portion is displaced along a horizontal direction, and the second direction is the direction of the displacement of the held portion. This is a direction in which the holding unit is lowered along the vertical direction.

  In the gaming machine according to a third aspect, in the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the holding portion is formed so as to be displaceable in a third direction that is different from the second direction, and the third holding portion is configured to be displaceable in the third direction. Is formed such that displacement in the second direction is possible after displacement in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operator has the held portion held by the player on one side and the other side is supported so that the held portion can be slid and displaced. It is possible to improve the operability of the holding unit, that is, the operability when adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. In this case, the player can be made to recognize the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion based on the interlocking displacement portion. Therefore, after the operating element is adjusted to the displacement position where the firing intensity of the game ball becomes the desired firing intensity, for example, in order to interrupt the game, the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operating element is shifted to the initial position. When the player is returned, or, for example, when the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element is changed to the maximum displacement position in order to make a right-handed hit, the player sets the interlocking displacement portion to Based on the recognition of the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion as a reference, the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion is changed to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position before interrupting the game or right-handing). It can be adjusted (restored). Therefore, the operation of adjusting the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position can be performed accurately and quickly.

  In this case, it is possible to cancel the displacement of the interlocking displacement unit in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element by the interlocking release unit. That is, the interlocking disengagement means releases the interlocking displacement unit from interlocking with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, thereby separating the interlocking displacement unit from the sliding displacement of the held element of the operation element. It can be kept (fixed) at the displaced position when separated. Thereby, in a state in which the operating element is adjusted to the displacement position at which the firing intensity of the game ball becomes the desired firing intensity, the interlocking disengagement unit releases the interlocking displacement unit so that the interlocking displacement unit remains at the predetermined displacement position ( Fixed), and can be used as a reference when adjusting (returning) the operation element to the original displacement position. Therefore, when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position, the adjustment operation can be performed accurately and quickly.

  Further, since the held portion is displaced in the second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, the release by the interlock release means is performed, so that the release operation can be easily performed. It can be carried out. That is, the player displaces the held portion of the operation element in the direction of the slide displacement, adjusts the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then moves the held portion in the second direction from that state. It is sufficient to perform an operation of displacing, and in order to release by the interlock release means, it is necessary to perform an operation of holding the held part and an operation of operating another operating means with a hand opposite to the hand that operates the held part. There is no. As a result, an operation (release operation) for performing release by the interlock release unit can be easily performed.

  Note that the held portion held by the player is not limited to a shape that the player can hold with his / her fingers. For example, a shape that allows the player to place the palm or back of the hand is exemplified. Examples of the structure that supports the other side of the operation element include a structure that rotatably supports the other side of the operation element and a structure that supports the other side of the operation element so as to be displaceable along the guide groove. . The structure for supporting the shaft is not limited to the structure for rotatably supporting only one shaft, and may be a structure for supporting the shaft movably (for example, a structure in which a spherical body is held by a spherical bearing). In the structure for supporting along the guide groove, the guide groove may be linear, may be curved, or may be a combination thereof.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the direction in which the held portion of the operation element is displaced is the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. Is the direction in which the held portion is displaced along the horizontal direction, and the second direction for releasing by the interlocking release means is the direction in which the held portion is lowered along the vertical direction. The operation (release operation) for performing release by the interlock release means is facilitated while maintaining the operation amount of the unit in the direction of slide displacement (ie, suppressing the shift of the operation position in the direction of slide displacement). Can be done.

  That is, the player performs an operation of displacing the held portion of the operation element in the direction of the slide displacement, adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then displacing the held portion in the second direction. In this case, the held portion can be easily displaced in the second direction only by applying the weight of the hand to the held portion, or by simply turning the wrist downward. As a result, the operation for canceling by the interlock canceling unit while maintaining the operation amount of the held portion in the direction of the slide displacement (that is, suppressing the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement) ( Release operation) can be easily performed.

  Note that the direction of the slide displacement does not need to be parallel to the horizontal direction. That is, the expression that the direction of the slide displacement is along the horizontal direction means that a range of an inclination angle of ± 60 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction is an allowable range. That is, it is not necessary to be completely horizontal, and part or all of the trajectory of the slide displacement may be inclined downward or upward. Further, the slide displacement is not limited to the form in which the locus is linear, but includes a form in which all or a part of the locus is curved in an arc shape. If the trajectory is curved in an arc, the tangential direction is the direction of the slide displacement.

  Here, in claim 2, the second direction is a direction along the horizontal direction and a front-rear direction of the gaming machine (that is, a direction in which the held portion of the operation element is directed from the front surface of the gaming machine to the player, or (A direction from the player toward the front of the gaming machine). According to this configuration, it is also possible to maintain the operation amount of the held portion in the direction of the slide displacement (that is, to suppress the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement) and to perform the release by the interlock release means. The operation (release operation) can be easily performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the release by the interlocking release means of the interlocking displacement portion being displaced in conjunction with the operation element is performed in the third direction. Is performed when the held portion is displaced in the second direction after being displaced to the second direction, so that the held portion of the operation element is inadvertently operated in the second direction, and the firing intensity differs from the intention of the player. Thus, it is possible to prevent the release by the interlock release unit from being executed. That is, since the second direction is a direction of descending along the vertical direction, as described above, it is easy to use the weight of the hand, and therefore, the operation of the held portion in the second direction is easy. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the held portion may be inadvertently operated in the second direction, but the condition is that the held portion is displaced in the second direction after being displaced in the third direction. Thus, it is possible to effectively suppress the inadvertent execution of the release by the interlock release means at a firing intensity different from the player's intention.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5A is a top view of the handle device, and FIG. 5B is a side view of the handle device as viewed in the direction of the arrow Vb in FIG. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device taken along the line VI-VI in FIG. 7A is a side view of the lower base, FIG. 7B is a top view of the lower base as viewed in the direction of arrow VIIb in FIG. 7A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of a lower side base in VIIc-VIIc line. 8A is a side view of the intermediate base, FIG. 8B is a top view of the intermediate base as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIIIb in FIG. 8A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate base in VIIIc line. 9A is a side view of the upper base, FIG. 9B is a bottom view of the upper base as viewed in the direction of the arrow IXb of FIG. 9A, and FIG. 9C is a view of IXc− in FIG. 9B. It is sectional drawing of an upper side base in IXc line. (A) And (b) is a partial sectional side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. 11A is a side view of the rotating shaft portion, FIG. 11B is a rear view of the rotating shaft portion as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIb in FIG. 11A, and FIG. FIG. (A) is a top view of the rotating shaft portion as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIa in FIG. 11 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating shaft portion along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12 (a). 13A is a side view of the operation element, and FIG. 13B is a top view of the operation element as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line XIVa-XIVa in FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line XIVb-XIVb in FIG. is there. It is sectional drawing of the interlocking displacement part and the pressing member in the state attached to the upper side base. (A) is a side view of the interlocking displacement unit, and (b) is a bottom view of the interlocking displacement unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIb in FIG. (A) is a top view of the interlocking displacement part as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the interlocking displacement part along line XVIIb-XVIIb in FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a side view of the pressing member, and (b) is a top view of the pressing member as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). (A) is a side view of the elevating member, and (b) is a top view of the elevating member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIXb in FIG. FIG. 4 is a developed plan view in which an inner peripheral surface of a cylindrical portion of the rotation shaft is developed into a plane and illustrated. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged development view in which a range XXb in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. (A) to (d) are schematic top views of the handle device. (A) to (d) are schematic perspective views of a rotating shaft portion and an interlocking displacement portion. (A) is a side view of the operation element in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a top view of the operation element in the arrow XXIXb direction of FIG. 29 (a). 29A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line XXXa-XXXa in FIG. 29B, and FIG. 29B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 29B. is there. It is sectional drawing of the handle device in 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. (A)-(c) is a side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. It is a side view of a rotation axis part and an operation element in a 3rd embodiment. It is a side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. (A) And (b) is a partial section side view of an operation element and a rotation axis part in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a side view of the operation element, and (b) is a top view of the operation element as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 38A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operator along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38B, and FIG. 38B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operator along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. is there. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. (A) is a top view of the handle device in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the handle device in the arrow XLIIIb direction of FIG. 43 (a). It is a partial section side view of a handle device.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, a handle device 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  The handle device 51 includes a touch sensor for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 891 for stopping firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a touch sensor during the pressing operation. Is a right-handed switch 892 that maximizes the firing intensity of the ball, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of sliding operation (displacement position in the sliding direction) of the handle device 51 (operator 800) by a change in electrical resistance. ) Etc. are arranged.

  When the operation element 800 of the handle device 51 is slid by the player in the right direction (the direction of arrow I, see FIG. 5A), the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor is reduced. The ball changes in accordance with the slide operation amount, and the ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, whereby the ball jumps to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The ball is driven. Further, when the handle device 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor, the firing stop switch 891 and the right strike switch 892 are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the handle device 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), windmills, rails 61 and 62, General winning opening 63, first opening 64, second opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display device unit 80 The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is provided in the through hole, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are arranged in the upper right portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated. On the other hand, when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being changed, during working hours, or in the normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing, or not, by changing the lighting state, and the stop symbol is definitely changed. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or the off symbol, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. Each of the seven-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different from each other, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when there is a ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) of the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability is unchanged, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance port This refers to a game state in which a ball easily enters 640. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable changes and during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and a longer time than in normal times Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes a state that it is easy to ball. Therefore, during probable changes or during working hours, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one time are not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs a variable display of the three symbols, and a third symbol display device 81 triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. There is provided a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs for variably displaying two symbols. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as display symbols (second symbols) for a predetermined time. The variable display for alternately lighting is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  Note that the second entrance 640 can be increased during the probability change or during the working hours by increasing the probability of hitting during the probability changing or the working hours, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. In the case where the ball is easy to enter, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to be able to pass a part of a ball flowing down the left side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. ing. Further, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and allows a part of the balls flowing down the right side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board to pass therethrough. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. If so, a symbol "x" is displayed as a symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp. 84 is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four, but is three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). May be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, a second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are different numbers, for example. The number of award balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 is set to three, and the number of award balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 is set to five. You may.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the change of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 during the probable change and during the working hours can be created as compared with the normal state.

  Here, depending on whether the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640, the probability of a big hit is a low probability state or a high probability state. Are identical. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is that the ball entered the first entry port 64 when the ball entered the second entry port 640. It is set higher than you would. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and is in a state where a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 to increase the chance of a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (a so-called “right-hit”), and aims at a 15R certain-variable big hit by entering the second entrance 640. However, this is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the first entry opening 64 becomes a jackpot, the first symbol is stopped so that the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided below the second ball entrance 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the second entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the first symbol is set so as to become a jackpot stop symbol. The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated, for example, at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 are, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and a forward side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided. The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba corresponding to the jackpot are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are turned on. The opening is performed for a predetermined time, and when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is set. A game state that is opened for a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 650a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result in the second symbol display device 83. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of specific winning ports 65a and 650a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 through the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the slide operation amount of the handle device 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the handle device 51, and the firing stop switch 891 for stopping the firing of the ball and the right-hand switch 892 for maximizing the firing intensity of the ball are turned off. Under the condition that the handle device 51 is not operated, the firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the sliding operation amount (displacement position in the sliding direction) of the handle device 51, and the ball is moved with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the handle device 51. Fired.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5A is a top view of the handle device 51, and FIG. 5B is a side view of the handle device 51 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Vb in FIG. 5A. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device 51 taken along the line VI-VI in FIG.

  5 (a) and 5 (b), the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (that is, the mounting surface of the handle device 51) is schematically shown by a two-dot chain line, and the operating element 800 is moved within a movable range. The state of being slid to the substantially center in FIG. Also, in FIG. 6, only the handle mounting base 600 is cross-sectionally viewed, and the cross-sectional views of other components are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the handle device 51 includes a handle mount 600, a rotation shaft 700 rotatably supported by the handle mount 600, and an operation connected to the rotation shaft 700. The pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) has a main body 810 that is horizontally positioned in front of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). It is arranged in a posture protruding from the camera.

  The handle mounting base 600 includes a lower base 610, an intermediate base 620, and an upper base 630, and is overlapped with the intermediate base 620 interposed between the lower base 610 and the upper base 630. The upper and lower ends (upper and lower sides in FIG. 5B) are closed, and are formed in a cylindrical shape having openings formed in side surfaces (right side surface in FIG. 5B). Note that a storage section 640 is provided on the lower surface of the handle mounting base 600 (the lower base 610). The storage section 640 stores a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotation shaft section 700 based on a change in electrical resistance.

  The rotating shaft portion 700 is rotatably disposed inside the handle mount 600 in a vertical posture in which the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion 700 is along a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 6). A connecting piece 780 protrudes from the lower end surface of the rotating shaft 700, and the connecting piece 780 is connected to a variable resistor housed in the housing 640. Therefore, when the rotating shaft 700 is rotated, the resistance of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotating shaft 700, and the strength corresponding to the resistance of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at (firing intensity).

  The operation element 800 is slidably attached to the handle mounting base 600 via the rotation shaft 700. That is, the operating element 800 is rotated about the axis of the rotating shaft 700 (displaced in a virtual plane perpendicular to the axis of the rotating shaft 700), as shown in FIG. 5A. In addition, it is possible to slide in the directions of arrows I and D within the range from the initial position Pmin to the maximum movable position Pmax.

  When the operation element 800 is slid by the player in the direction of the arrow I or the direction of the arrow D (sliding operation), the rotating shaft 700 is rotated around the axis, and the variable resistor is rotated according to the amount of rotation (rotational position). Of the game ball is increased or decreased by changing the resistance value of the game ball. Further, when the slide operation by the player is released, the operation element 800 is slid in the direction of arrow D by the urging force of the slide direction urging spring 681, and returns to the initial position Pmin. In the present embodiment, the sliding movement of the operation element 800 (the main body 810) is performed along a horizontal plane (a plane perpendicular to the direction of gravity).

  The operation element 800 can be displaced in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 6) with respect to the handle mounting base 600 about a portion (the connection shaft 990) supported by the rotary shaft 700. That is, the operating element 800 is formed so as to be able to push down the held part 830 downward (in the direction of the arrow G in FIG. 5B) with the connecting shaft 990 as the center of rotation (see FIG. 22). In the present embodiment, the operation of pressing down the operation element 800 (the held part 830) is performed downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the operation of pressing down the operation element 800 (the held part 830) causes the weight of the player's hand to act on the held part 830 of the operation element 800, or returns the wrist holding the held part 830 downward. It can be easily performed only with this.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the operation of pushing down the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 (the operation of pushing down the holding portion 830 downward (in the direction of arrow G), and then returning to the position before the pushing down; the same applies hereinafter). By doing so (see FIGS. 25 and 26), it is possible to switch whether or not to interlock the interlocking displacement unit 900 with the sliding operation of the operating element 800. A structure for switching the interlocking state of the interlocking displacement unit 900 in response to the operation of pushing down the operation element 800 will be described later.

  A mark 894 is displayed on the upper surface of the operation element 800 as shown in FIG. With the mark 894, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the relative position between the operation element 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900. In particular, in this embodiment, since the operation element 800 (main body part 810) and the interlocking displacement part 900 are separated from each other in the height direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 5B), the mark 894 is used for the two. It is effective that the relative position can be grasped.

  The interlocking displacement unit 900 is a member for storing a displacement position (slide operation position) of the operation element 800 in the sliding direction, and has a tip outward from the outer peripheral surface of the handle mount 600 (that is, the same as the operation element 800). Direction). In a normal state, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is slid and displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the operation element 800. On the other hand, when the held part 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down (in the direction of arrow G), the operation is performed. The child 800 is cut off, and its displacement position is fixed. That is, the slide operation position of the operation element 800 at the time when the holding section 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down is stored as the fixed position of the interlocking displacement section 900.

  Therefore, the player operates the operating element 800 at a position where the firing intensity of the game ball becomes a desired firing intensity (for example, a position where a firing intensity suitable for causing the game ball to enter the first entrance 64) is obtained. When the slide operation position of the operation member 800 can be adjusted, the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is pushed down to fix the displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion 900, for example, to take a break. After the game is interrupted by returning the slide operation position of the operation device 800 to the initial position Pmin, or after the slide operation position of the operation device 800 is slid to the maximum movable position Pmax in order to make a right-handed operation, The slide operation position of the child 800 is the original operation position (that is, the operation position before the game is interrupted or right-handed, and the operation position suitable for entering the first entrance 64 described above). When adjusting to Slides the operation element 800 with the displacement position to which the interlock displacement section 900 is fixed as a reference (target position) (that is, the mark 894 of the operation element 800 coincides with the arrangement position of the interlock displacement section 900). Thus, the slide operation position of the operation element 800 can be accurately and quickly adjusted to the original operation position (that is, the original displacement position can be accurately and quickly reproduced).

  As described above, the player grips the held portion 830 with his hand and slides the operation element 800 to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity. When the position is fixed, the held portion 830 held by the hand may be pushed down while keeping the state, and the operation of changing the held portion 830 and the hand operating the held portion 830 may be performed. Does not need to perform operations such as operating another operation means with the opposite hand. Therefore, an operation for fixing the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be easily performed.

  Note that when the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G), the flip-up biasing spring 880 is elastically expanded and deformed, and when the pushing force of the player is reduced, the flip-up direction is increased. Due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 880, the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is displaced upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G), and the initial position shown in FIG. ).

  The operator 800 is provided with a firing stop switch 891 and a right-hand switch 892. By pressing the firing stop switch 891 irrespective of the slide operation position (operation amount) of the operation element 800, the player can stop the firing of the game ball and press the right strike switch 892. Thus, the game ball can be fired with the maximum firing intensity.

  Next, the handle mount 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7A is a side view of the lower base 610, and FIG. 7B is a top view of the lower base 610 when viewed in the direction of arrow VIIb in FIG. 7A, and FIG. FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view of the lower base 610 taken along the line VIIc-VIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the lower base 610 includes a body 611 formed in a cylindrical shape, a bottom wall 612 for closing a lower opening of the body 611, and an outer side from the outer peripheral surface of the body 611. 613, a fastening seat 614, a bearing 615 standing upward from the bottom wall 612, and a support shaft 616 standing upward on the side of the bearing 615. Are formed.

  An opening 611a is formed in the body portion 611 by cutting out a part thereof. The opening 611a is a cutout portion for securing a displacement space in the sliding direction (the directions of arrows I and D) and the pressing direction (the direction of the arrow G) of the operation element 800 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and FIG. In the top view shown in (b), it is formed over a range of a central angle of about 170 degrees. Note that the lower base 610 is formed such that the opening 611a is continuous with the opening above the body 611 (the upper side in FIG. 7C) (that is, the opening 611a on the side surface of the body 611 and the upper side of the body 611). The opening is communicated with the opening), so that the opening area as a whole can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability when assembling the rotary shaft 700 and the operating element 800, or the rotary shaft connecting gear 671 and the sliding direction urging spring 681 in the lower base 610. .

  The fastening flange 613 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body 611 at an upper end (upper side in FIG. 7A) of the body 611, and a pair of the flanges 613 is arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. The pair of fastening flanges 613 are provided with insertion holes 613a, respectively. Similar fastening flanges 623, 633 are also provided on the intermediate base 620 and the upper base 630, and the fastening flanges 613, 623, 633 are overlapped with each other and inserted into the insertion holes 613a, 623a, 633a. The bases 610, 620, and 630 are connected and fixed by being fastened and fixed by the fastening bolts B, and the handle mounting base 600 is formed (see FIG. 5).

  The fastening seat portion 614 is a portion that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 611 at the lower end (lower side in FIG. 7A) of the body portion 611, and has a phase of 180 degrees with respect to the opening 611a. It is arranged at different positions. The outer surface (the left surface in FIGS. 7A and 7B) of the fastening seat 614 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the axis of the body 611 (hereinafter, referred to as “seat surface 614 a”). The seat surface 614a serves as a mounting surface (seat surface) when the handle device 51 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (see FIG. 5).

  At the center of the bottom wall 612, a circular insertion hole 612a is formed in a front view. The connecting piece 780 of the rotating shaft 700 is connected to the variable resistor in the housing 640 via the insertion hole 612a (see FIG. 6). The bearing 615 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the insertion hole 612 a of the bottom wall 612, and the lower end side of the rotating shaft 700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing 615 (see FIG. 6).

  The support shaft portion 616 is a portion for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft portion connection gear 671 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 6), and is formed in a shaft shape with a circular cross section. Specifically, the support shaft portion 616 includes a small-diameter portion located on the distal end side and a large-diameter portion formed to have a larger diameter than the small-diameter portion, and the rotation-shaft connecting gear 671 can rotate on the small-diameter portion. It is supported by. The rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671 includes a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 616, and a retaining ring (not shown) such as an E-ring that is fitted to the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 616. , The movement in the axial direction is regulated (held so as not to be able to be removed).

  A sliding-direction urging spring 681 formed as a torsion spring is held on the support shaft 616 on the lower surface side of the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671 (see FIG. 6). Is applied to the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671. The rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671 returns the operating element 800 to the initial position Pmin via the rotating shaft portion 700 (the connecting gear portion 770) by the urging force applied from the sliding direction urging spring 681.

  8A is a side view of the intermediate base 620, FIG. 8B is a top view of the intermediate base 620 when viewed in the direction of the arrow VIIIb in FIG. 8A, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate base 620 taken along the line VIIIc-VIIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the intermediate base 620 includes a disk portion 621 formed in a disk shape, an outer wall portion 622 disposed along an outer edge on a lower surface of the disk portion 621, and a disk portion 621. And a through-hole 624 formed at the center of the disk portion 621.

  The outer diameter of the disk portion 621 is the same as the outer diameter of the body portion 611 of the lower base 610 and the body portion 631 of the upper base 630. In the assembled state of the handle mount 600, the disk portion 621 of the intermediate base 620 is provided. Are sandwiched between the axial end surfaces of the trunk 611 of the lower base 610 and the trunk 631 of the upper base 630 (see FIGS. 5 and 6).

  The outer wall portion 622 is a portion for shielding the internal space of the lower base 610 from the outside (see FIGS. 5B and 6), and a cylindrical body concentric with the disk portion 621 has a central angle of approximately 170 degrees. And is fitted into the opening 611a in the body 611 of the lower base 610. Thus, the rigidity of the entire handle mount 600 can be increased.

  Also, by forming a portion corresponding to the outer wall portion 622 on the intermediate base 620 instead of the lower base 610, the rigidity of the handle mounting base 600 as a whole is ensured while the lower portion is formed as described above. Since the opening area of the side base 610 as a whole can be ensured, the rotary shaft 700 and the operating element 800, or the rotary shaft connecting gear 671 and the sliding direction urging spring 681 are provided in the lower base 610 accordingly. Workability in mounting and assembling can be improved.

  The fastening flange 623 is a plate-like body that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the disk portion 621 and is set to have the same thickness as the disk portion 621, and a pair is disposed with a phase difference of 180 degrees. Each of the pair of fastening flanges 623 has an insertion hole 623a. As described above, the fastening flange 623 overlaps the fastening flanges 613 and 633 of the lower base 610 and the upper base 630 and is fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 5).

  The insertion hole 624 rotatably supports the rotating shaft 700 by its inner peripheral surface (see FIG. 6). A cylindrical bearing 621a is disposed on the lower surface of the disk portion 621 at a position concentric with the insertion hole 624, and the rotating shaft 700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing 621a. Is done. Since the bearing area can be secured by the amount of the bearing portion 621a, it is possible to improve the bearing accuracy and durability of the rotating shaft portion 700.

  9A is a side view of the upper base 630, FIG. 9B is a bottom view of the upper base 630 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IXb of FIG. 9A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the upper side base 630 in the IXc-IXc line of FIG.9 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the upper base 630 includes a body 631 formed in a cylindrical shape, an upper wall 632 for closing the upper opening of the body 631, and an outer wall extending from the outer peripheral surface of the body 631. The fastening flange 633 and the fastening seat portion 634 to be protruded, the sliding holding portion 635 erected downward from the upper surface wall 632, and the support shaft erected downward on the side of the sliding holding portion 635. A portion 636 is formed.

  An opening 631a is formed in the body 631 by cutting out a part thereof. The opening 631a is a cutout portion for securing a displacement space in the sliding direction and the vertical direction of the interlocking displacement portion 900 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and has a central angle in a bottom view shown in FIG. 9B. It is formed over a range of approximately 170 degrees. Note that the upper base 630 has an opening 631a formed as a continuous (continuous) opening with the lower side (lower side in FIG. 9C) opening of the body 631, so that the entire opening area can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability when assembling the interlocking displacement portion 900 and the pressing member 950, or the interlocking displacement portion connecting gear 672 and the interlocking displacement portion biasing spring 682 in the upper base 630. .

  The fastening flange 633 is a plate-like body that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body 631 at the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9A) of the body 631, and has a phase difference of 180 degrees. Are provided, and an insertion hole 633 a is formed in each of the pair of fastening flanges 633. As described above, the fastening flange 633 overlaps the fastening flange 623 of the intermediate base 620 with the fastening flange 613 of the lower base 610, and is fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 5).

  The fastening seat portion 634 is a portion that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 631 at the upper end (upper side in FIG. 9A) of the trunk portion 631, and makes the phase differ by 180 degrees from the opening 631 a. It is arranged in the position where it was. The outer side surface (the left side surface in FIGS. 9A and 9B) of the fastening seat portion 634 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the axis of the body portion 631 (hereinafter, referred to as “seat surface 634a”). The seat surface 634a serves as a mounting surface (seat surface) when the handle device 51 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (see FIG. 5).

  The sliding holding portion 635 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the trunk portion 631, and holds the interlocking displacement portion 900 (see FIG. 6) slidably in the axial direction and rotatable in the circumferential direction by the outer peripheral surface. On the other hand, the sliding holding portion 635 holds the pressing member 950 (see FIG. 15) by its inner peripheral surface so as to be slidable in the axial direction, but not to rotate in the circumferential direction. Specifically, a key groove 635a having a rectangular cross section is formed in the inner peripheral surface of the sliding holding portion 635 along the axial direction, and the key groove 635a has a projection 953 of the pressing member 950 (FIG. 15). ), The rotation of the pressing member 950 in the circumferential direction is restricted. As described later, since the rotation of the pressing member 950 in the circumferential direction can be regulated, the fixing operation of the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be performed without applying the rotational force from the pressing member 950 to the interlocking displacement unit 900. As a result, the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be accurately fixed to a desired fixing position.

  The support shaft portion 636 is a portion for rotatably supporting the interlocking displacement portion connection gear 672 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 6), and is formed in a shaft shape with a circular cross section. Specifically, the support shaft portion 636 includes a small-diameter portion located on the distal end side and a large-diameter portion formed to have a larger diameter than the small-diameter portion, and the interlocking-displacement-portion connection gear 672 can rotate on the small-diameter portion. It is supported by. The interlocking displacement portion connecting gear 672 includes a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 636, and a retaining ring (not shown) such as an E-ring fitted into the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 636. , The movement in the axial direction is regulated (held so as not to be able to be removed).

  An interlocking displacement portion biasing spring 682 formed as a torsion spring is held by the support shaft portion 636 on the upper surface side of the interlocking displacement portion connection gear 672 (see FIG. 6). The biasing force from 682 is applied to the interlocking displacement unit connecting gear 672. The interlocking displacement unit connection gear 672 returns the interlocking displacement unit 900 to the initial position via the connection gear unit 920 of the interlocking displacement unit 900 by the urging force applied from the interlocking displacement unit urging spring 682.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14, the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 800 will be described. 10A and 10B are partial cross-sectional side views of the rotating shaft 700 and the operation device 800. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the operation device 800 is in the initial position. b) corresponds to a state where the operation element 800 is pressed down.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the operating element 800 and the rotating shaft 700 are connected via a connecting shaft 990. Thus, the operating element 800 can be displaced (operated) in two directions. That is, first, the operation element 800 is rotated around the connection shaft 990 as a rotation center, and the held portion 830 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B) (a push-down operation is performed). It is made possible. Second, the operator 800 is rotated integrally with the rotating shaft 700 about the axis of the rotating shaft 700, and the held portion 830 is slid in the sliding direction (the direction of arrow I and arrow D, FIG. 5 (a)) (slide operation).

  FIG. 11A is a side view of the rotating shaft 700, and FIG. 11B is a rear view of the rotating shaft 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIb in FIG. 11A, and FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the push-up member 410. FIG. FIG. 12A is a top view of the rotating shaft 700 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XIIa in FIG. 11A, and FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating the rotating shaft 700 along the line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. FIG. Note that FIGS. 11B and 11C show a state in which the push-up member 410 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the rotating shaft 700 has a rod-shaped shaft main body 710, an insertion hole 720 formed in the shaft main body 710, and an opening formed on the back side of the shaft main body 720. Opening 730, a hook part 740, an operator control part 750, a guide shaft 760, and a connection gear part 770 provided on the outer peripheral surface of the shaft main body 710, and a connection protruding from a lower end surface of the shaft main body 710. A piece 780 and an elastic piece 790 protruding toward the upper end of the shaft body 710 are provided.

  The shaft body 710 is formed as a solid rod having a circular cross section and coaxially connected to a cylindrical portion 711 formed in a cylindrical shape and a lower end (the lower side in FIG. 12B) of the cylindrical portion 711. And a real part 712, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  On the upper end surface (upper side surface in FIG. 12B) of the cylindrical portion 711, a reference surface 711a and a height position in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12B) of the shaft main body portion 710 are higher than the reference surface 711a. A raised surface 711b which is raised upward is formed, whereby a pair of step surfaces 711c connecting the reference surface 711a and the raised surface 711b are formed on the upper end side of the cylindrical member 711. As will be described later, the rotating shaft 700 can rotate the interlocking displacement unit 900 in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating shaft 700 by engaging the step surface 711c with the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900. (See FIGS. 6 and 24).

  As described above, the rotating shaft portion 700 and the interlocking displacement portion 900 are interlockingly displaced by the step surfaces 711c and 911c being engaged with each other. In comparison with the above, it is possible to suppress the displacement between the two due to slippage.

  The reference surface 711a and the raising surface 711b are flat surfaces perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft main body 710, and the pair of step surfaces 711c are parallel to each other and parallel to the axial direction of the shaft main body 710. Flat surface. Further, the pair of step surfaces 711c are arranged so that the phases are different by 180 degrees. That is, the virtual plane formed by the pair of step surfaces 711 c is a plane including the axis of the shaft main body 710.

  A guide groove 715 is formed in the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 711. The guide groove 715 is a groove for holding the elevating member 420 (see FIG. 19) at two positions of a first position (an interlocking position) or a second position (a separating position). The detailed configuration of the guide groove 715 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The insertion hole 720 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the connection shaft 990 is inserted, and a pair of holes is formed in the cylindrical portion 711 of the shaft main body 710. The connecting shaft 990 is made of brass and formed into a shaft having a circular cross section. The opening 730 is an opening for securing an arrangement space for the push-up member 410, and is formed as a rectangular opening in a rear view in the cylindrical portion 711 of the shaft main body 710, as shown in FIG. Protrusions 731 for rotatably supporting the push-up member 410 are provided on a pair of inner side surfaces facing the opening 730, respectively.

  Here, the push-up member 410 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. 11C, and as shown in FIG. 12B, a plate-like body having an L-shaped cross section with a lower end bent. The concave portions 411 are respectively formed on the upper end sides of the pair of outer surfaces facing each other. When the protrusion 731 of the opening 730 is fitted in the recess 411, the push-up member 410 is rotatably supported in the opening 730 about the protrusion 731 and the recess 411 as a rotation axis (see FIG. 10). The push-up member 410 is disposed in such a manner that the bent portion on the lower end side faces the axis of the cylindrical portion 711 of the shaft main body 710.

  The hook member 740 is a portion for engaging and holding one end of a spring-up biasing spring 880 formed as a coil spring (see FIG. 10), and has a portion having an L-shaped cross section that is bent upward. A pair is provided at a predetermined interval. The manipulator restricting portion 750 is a rod-shaped portion for restricting the displacement of the manipulator 800 about the connection shaft 990 as a rotation center, and is disposed on the back side of the shaft main body 710 and below the opening 730. .

  That is, the flip-up direction biasing spring 880 is disposed in a state of being elastically extended, and the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is lowered by the player (the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B). After being pushed down (see FIG. 10B), when the pushing-down operation is released, the operating element 800 causes the held portion 830 side to move by the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 880 in the flip-up direction. It is flipped upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G, see FIG. 5B). In this case, the displacement of the operation element 800 is restricted by the operation element restricting portion 750 receiving the lower surface of the main body 810 of the operation element 800. Thus, the operating element 800 is held at the initial position in the pressing operation (see FIG. 10A).

  As described above, since the operating element restricting portion 750 is a portion that receives the operating element 800 (the lower surface of the main body section 810) that has been jumped up by the urging force of the jumping direction urging spring 880, a large load is applied. However, in the present embodiment, such a manipulator restricting portion 750 is provided not on the thin cylindrical portion 711 but on the solid portion 712. Thereby, the rigidity can be secured and the jumped-up operator 800 (the lower surface of the main body 810) can be firmly received. As a result, the durability can be improved.

  The guide shaft 760 is a part for guiding the displacement direction of the operation element 800 and smoothing the displacement when pushing down the held part 830, and sandwiches the solid part 712 with respect to the operation element regulation part 750. And is disposed on the front side of the solid portion 712 on the opposite side. When the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down, the guide shaft 760 moves in the guide groove 870 of the operation element 800 (see FIG. 10B) to guide the displacement of the operation element 800. It can be guided along the groove 870. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the operation when the held part 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down.

  The connection gear portion 770 is a portion formed as a spur gear, and is meshed with the rotation shaft portion connection gear 671 (see FIG. 6). As described above, the urging force from the slide direction urging spring 681 is transmitted from the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671 to the connecting gear portion 770, whereby the rotating shaft portion 700 is rotated, and the operating element 800 is moved to the initial position Pmin. (See FIG. 5A).

  The connecting piece 780 is a shaft body fixed to the lower end surface of the shaft main body 710. As described above, the connection piece 780 is connected to the variable resistor (not shown) through the insertion hole 612a of the lower base 610.

  The elastic piece 790 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section, is disposed on the outer peripheral surface near the step surface 711c on the upper end side of the shaft main body 710 (cylindrical portion 711), and is higher than the raised surface 711b. It is projected to. The elastic piece 790 is a part for changing the operation feeling when the operation element 800 slides. That is, as will be described later, when the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed at a predetermined position and the operation unit 800 is slid using the interlocking displacement unit 900 as a target position, the sliding operation is performed at the target position (interlocking displacement unit 900). , The elastic piece 790 changes over the first protrusion 913 (that is, is elastically deformed), thereby changing the operational feeling of the slide operation (see FIG. 28). Accordingly, the player can recognize that the operation position of the slide operation has approached the target position without continuously tracking the positional relationship between the operation element 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 visually. Performance can be improved.

  FIG. 13A is a side view of the operation element 800, and FIG. 13B is a top view of the operation element 800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIIIb in FIG. FIG. 14A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator 800 taken along line XIVa-XIVa in FIG. 13B, and FIG. 14B is a manipulator 800 taken along line XIVb-XIVb in FIG. 13B. It is the elements on larger scale sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the operating element 800 includes a main body 810 including a base 811 and a leg 812, an insertion hole 820 formed in the leg 812 of the main body 810, and a main body 810. A held portion 830 erected from the base portion 811, a hook portion 840 and a support wall 850 provided on the outer surface of the base portion 811 of the main body portion 810, and a cam member 860 erected on the leg portion 812 of the main body portion 810 And a guide groove 870 provided on the inner surface of the leg 812 of the main body 810.

  The main body 810 includes a long box-shaped base 811 and a pair of legs 812 extending along the longitudinal direction from the base side of the base 811 (the left side in FIG. 13). A held portion 830 is set up substantially vertically on the tip side (the right side in FIG. 13) of the base portion 811. The pair of legs 812 are arranged substantially parallel to each other with a predetermined space therebetween, and the rotating shaft 700 is disposed between the pair of legs 812.

  Further, insertion holes 820 are formed in the pair of leg portions 812 along the facing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 13B). The rotation shaft 700 is disposed between the pair of legs 812 and the connecting shaft 990 inserted from one of the insertion holes 820 of the pair of legs 812 passes through the insertion hole 720 of the rotation shaft 700. At the same time, the operation element 800 is connected to the rotary shaft 700 via the connection shaft 990 by being inserted into the other insertion hole 820 of the pair of leg portions 812, and below the held portion 830 (arrow G). Direction (see FIG. 5B)) (see FIG. 10).

  The extended distal ends (the left side in FIG. 13A) of the pair of leg portions 812 are formed to be curved in an arc shape in a side view shown in FIG. 13A, and the outer peripheral surface of a portion curved in the arc shape , Elastic membrane members 893 are respectively adhered. The elastic film member 893 is a member formed in a film shape from an elastic material such as a rubber material. When the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down, the connection shaft 990 becomes the center of rotation, and the leg portion 812 pushed up causes the elastic film member 893 to move the disk portion 621 on the intermediate base 620. (See FIG. 25). Thus, the displacement of the operation element 800 in the sliding operation direction can be restricted by using the adhesion force (frictional force) of the elastic film member 893. That is, it is possible to prevent the operation element 800 from being displaced in the sliding direction in a state where the held portion 830 is pressed down.

  The held portion 830 is a portion that is gripped by the fingers or palms of the player when the operator 800 performs a sliding operation or a pressing operation, and is formed as a rod-like body having a substantially rectangular cross section with a corner chamfered in an arc shape. Is done. As described above, since the held portion 830 is formed as a rod-shaped body, the held portion 830 can be easily held (gripped), and as a result, when the operation element 800 is slid and pushed down. Operability can be improved.

  Further, since the held portion 830 is provided upright along the vertical direction from the main body 810, the held portion 830 can be held (held) by a player in a natural posture. In particular, since the held portion 830 is erected upward from the main body 810, the outer edge of the palm may be placed on the upper surface of the main body 810 when gripping the held portion 830. it can. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player, and when pushing down the operation element 800, the weight of the hand can also be applied to the upper surface of the main body 810, so that the pushing down operation is easy. Can be done.

  The above-described firing stop switch 891 and right-handed switch 892 are provided on the standing end of the held portion 830 and on the back side of the held portion 830 (the side facing the connecting shaft 990 (see FIG. 10)). This allows the player to easily operate the firing stop switch 891 with the thumb or forefinger and the right-hand switch 892 with the forefinger or middle finger with the held portion 830 naturally grasped.

  The hook member 840 is a part for engaging and holding the other end of the flip-up direction urging spring 880 whose one end is engaged and held by the hook part 740 (see FIG. 11) of the rotary shaft 700 (see FIG. 10). ), And is formed in an L-shaped cross section bent downward.

  The support wall 850 is a wall portion for supporting the spring 880 in a flip-up direction from below, and is formed to be curved in a convex arc shape upward in a side view shown in FIG. In this manner, by bending the support wall 850 in an arc shape, the space for disposing the spring 880 in the flip-up direction (the distance between the hooks 740 and 840) can be made longer (see FIG. )), A spring 880 having a longer overall length can be used in a limited space. As a result, the urging force can be secured, and the durability of the spring 880 can be secured.

  The cam member 860 is a member for pushing up the push-up member 410 displaceably disposed on the rotating shaft 700, and includes a rod-shaped erection portion 861 erected between the pair of legs 812. The extending portion 861 extends from the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 13B) to the base 811 side (that is, the side where the rotating shaft 700 is disposed, and the right side in FIG. 13B). A push-up cam 862 is provided, and these are integrally formed. The cam member 860 is formed separately from the main body 810, and both ends of the bridging portion 861 are fastened and fixed to the legs 812 of the main body 810 by fastening bolts (not shown).

  The push-up cam 862 is formed in a triangular shape in a sectional view, and is arranged with a triangular top portion facing upward as shown in FIG. In a state where the rotating shaft 700 is connected to the main body 810 (between the pair of legs 812) via the connecting shaft 990, the push-up cam 862 has a triangular apex having a rotating shaft (projection) of the push-up member 410. 731 and the concave portion 411, which are disposed vertically downward in FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (c), and a triangular slope (the right side in FIG. 14 (a)) is a push-up member. It is arranged at a position that supports the lower end of 410 (see FIG. 10A).

  When the operating element 800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B), the cam member 860 is provided with a slope on one side (right side in FIG. 14A) of the triangular shape of the push-up cam 862. Using the top portion (upper side in FIG. 14A), the push-up member 410 disposed on the rotary shaft 700 is pushed up (see FIGS. 10A and 10B).

  As described above, the push-up cam 862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross-section, and a structure in which the push-up member 410 is pushed up by using the slope and the top portion thereof allows a normal state in which the operating element 800 is not pushed down. (See FIG. 10 (a)), the push-up member 410 can be arranged further downward, and the operating element 800 is pushed down while reducing the size in the overall height direction (axial direction, vertical direction in FIG. 10 (a)). When the operation is performed (see FIG. 10B), the amount of upward pushing of the push-up member 410 can be secured, so that the stroke amount required for the operation of pushing down the operating element 800 is reduced, and the operability is improved. In addition to this, it is possible to surely switch the interlocking / non-interlocking of the interlocking displacement unit 900 by increasing the elevating stroke of the elevating member 420 (see FIG. 19) (see FIGS. See 5).

  The guide groove 870 is a concave groove for guiding the guide shaft 760 (see FIG. 11) of the rotating shaft 700, and is formed as a groove having a rectangular cross section on the opposing surfaces of the pair of legs 812. And is curved and extended in an arc shape with the center as the center. Therefore, when the operation element 800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B) (see FIGS. 10A and 10B), the guide shaft 760 of the rotary shaft 700 is operated. By moving along the guide groove 870 and being guided, it is possible to smoothly perform the operation of pushing down the operation element 800, which is the displacement around the connection shaft 990.

  Note that the main body 810 and the held portion 830 have a two-part structure in which the center in the width direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 13B) is a dividing surface (matching surface). That is, the main body part 810 and the held part 830 are formed to be plane-symmetric with respect to the first component forming one side of the main body part 810 and the held part 830, and the divided surface is symmetrical with respect to the first component. 810 and a second component forming one side of the held portion 830. By joining the first component and the second component with each other at their divided surfaces, a fire stop switch 891 and the like are provided inside thereof. It is formed in a hollow shape having a space for wiring an electrical connection line.

  Next, the interlocking displacement part 900 and the pressing member 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the interlocking displacement unit 900 and the pressing member 950 in a state where it is attached to the upper base 630.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the upper surface wall 632 of the upper base 630 is provided with a sliding holding portion 635 on the lower surface side thereof. Each member 950 is provided. As described above, the interlocking displacement portion 900 is slidable in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 15) and rotatable in the circumferential direction by inserting the slide holding portion 635 into the insertion hole 925. The pressing member 950 is slidable in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 15) by fitting the protrusion 953 into the key groove 635a of the sliding holding portion 635, but cannot rotate in the circumferential direction. It is said.

  A pressing direction urging spring 970 formed as a coil spring is disposed on the lower surface side of the upper surface wall 632 of the upper base 630, and the pressing direction urging spring 970 is provided between the upper surface wall 632 and the interlocking displacement unit 900. And is arranged in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed. Therefore, the urging force (elastic recovery force) from the pressing direction urging spring 970 is applied to the pressing member 950 via the interlocking displacement unit 900, whereby the lifting member 420 is moved to the first position (interlocking position). ) Or the second position (separation position) (see FIGS. 24 and 26), the pressing member 950 always keeps being pressed down (downward in FIG. 15). .

  The interlocking displacement unit 900 is pressed against the pressing member 950 by the urging force applied from the pressing direction urging spring 970, while the elevating member 420 is held at the first position (interlocking position) or the second position (cutoff position). Therefore, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is in a state of being sandwiched (pressed and held) between the pressing-direction urging spring 970 and the elevating member 420. Therefore, when the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the rotation shaft unit 700, it is held at the separated position.

  FIG. 16A is a side view of the interlocking displacement unit 900, and FIG. 16B is a bottom view of the interlocking displacement unit 900 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A. FIG. 17A is a top view of the interlocking displacement unit 900 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16A, and FIG. 17B is an interlocking displacement along line XVIIb-XVIIb in FIG. FIG. 9 is a sectional view of a part 900.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the interlocking displacement unit 900 includes an interlocking main body 910 formed in a cylindrical shape, and a connecting gear 920 disposed coaxially on the upper end side of the interlocking main body 910. An urging spring holding portion 930 protruding from an upper surface side of the coupling gear portion 920; a pointing piece 940 extending radially outward from an outer peripheral surface on a lower end side of the interlocking main body portion 910; The first projection 913 and the second projection 914 are formed to project from the outer peripheral surface on the lower end side of the portion 910.

  On the lower end surface (lower side surface of FIGS. 16A and 17B) of the interlocking main body 910, a reference surface 911a and the axial direction of the interlocking main body 910 (see FIGS. A raised surface 911b whose height position in FIG. 17 (b) is raised downward is formed, whereby a reference surface 911a and a raised surface 911b are formed on the lower end side of the interlocking main body 911. A pair of step surfaces 911c to be connected are formed.

  As described above, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is configured such that the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is engaged with the step surface 711c of the rotation shaft unit 700, so that the rotation shaft 700 The rotation can be transmitted to the interlocking displacement unit 900, and the interlocking displacement unit 900 is rotated (displaced) in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating shaft 700 (sliding operation of the operation element 800) (see FIGS. 6 and 24). Since the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is disengaged from the step surface 711c of the rotary shaft unit 700, the rotation of the rotary shaft unit 700 accompanying the sliding operation of the operation element 800 is transmitted to the interlocking displacement unit 900. However, when the operation element 800 is slid, only the rotating shaft 700 is rotated, and the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed at a predetermined position (see FIGS. 23 and 26).

  The reference surface 911a and the raising surface 911b are flat surfaces perpendicular to the axial direction of the interlocking main body 910, and the pair of step surfaces 911c are parallel to each other and parallel to the axial direction of the interlocking main body 910. Flat surface. In addition, the pair of step surfaces 911c are arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. That is, a virtual plane formed by the pair of step surfaces 911 c is a plane including the axis of the shaft main body 910.

  The first protrusion 913 and the second protrusion 914 are portions for giving a change to the operational feeling when sliding the operation element 800, and are formed as hemispherical protrusions protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the interlocking main body 910. . That is, the first protrusion 913 and the second protrusion 914 are disposed on the movement locus of the elastic piece 790 when the rotation shaft 700 is rotated in accordance with the sliding operation of the operating element 800. By passing (passing over) the first protrusion 913 and the second protrusion 914, an operation resistance is generated, and the feeling of operation is changed.

  The connection gear portion 920 is a portion formed as a spur gear, and is meshed with the interlocking displacement portion connection gear 672 (see FIG. 6). As described above, the urging force from the interlocking displacement unit urging spring 682 is transmitted from the interlocking displacement unit connection gear 672 to the connection gear unit 920, thereby rotating the interlocking displacement unit 900 and returning to the initial position Pmin. (See FIG. 5A).

  The biasing spring holding portion 930 is a portion for holding the pushing direction biasing spring 970 by being fitted inside the inner circumference of the pushing direction biasing spring 970. It is formed with a corresponding outer diameter.

  Insertion holes 925 are formed in the urging spring holding portion 930 and the connection gear portion 920 along their axes. The insertion hole 925 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the slide holding portion 635 of the upper base 630 is inserted (see FIG. 15). The inner diameter of the insertion hole 925 is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the slide holder 635, so that the interlocking displacement unit 900 can slide in the axial direction and rotate in the circumferential direction relative to the slide holder 635. It is possible.

  The indicating piece 940 is a flat plate-shaped portion for indicating the displacement position (target position) of the operating element 800, and is an outer peripheral surface of the interlocking main body 910, on the side of the raising surface 911b (the axis center with respect to the reference surface 911a). It is disposed on the outer peripheral surface that is on the opposite side between them. That is, when the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is engaged with the step surface 711c of the rotary shaft 700 (see FIGS. 6 and 24), the phase between the pointing piece 940 and the operating element 800 (slide displacement direction) (Displacement positions at the same time) (both overlap in top view; see FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b)).

  FIG. 18A is a side view of the pressing member 950, and FIG. 18B is a top view of the pressing member 950 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18A.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the pressing member 950 includes a disk portion 951 formed in a disk shape, a shaft portion 952 erected from the upper surface of the disk portion 951, and an outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 952. The projections 953 are formed so as to protrude.

  The disk portion 951 is a portion for pushing down the upper surface of the elevating member 420 with its lower surface, and is formed to have an outer diameter that can be arranged on the inner peripheral side of the interlocking main body portion 910 of the interlocking displacement portion 900 (see FIG. . The shaft portion 952 is a shaft having a circular cross section inserted through the inner periphery of the sliding holding portion 635 of the upper base 630, and the protrusion 953 is formed in a key groove 635 a formed on the inner periphery of the sliding holding portion 635. The projections to be engaged. Therefore, the pressing member 950 can slide in the axial direction with respect to the sliding holding portion 635, but is held in a state in which rotation in the circumferential direction is restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 10 to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. A guide groove 715 is formed in the shaft main body 710 of the rotary shaft 700 on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 711. As described above, the guide groove 715 is a groove for holding the elevating member 420 (see FIG. 19) at two positions of a first position (an interlocking position) or a second position (a separating position). Here, the elevating member 420 and the guide groove 715 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 19A is a side view of the elevating member 420, and FIG. 19B is a top view of the elevating member 420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIXb in FIG. 19A.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the elevating member 420 is a member disposed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 711 (see FIG. 15) of the rotating shaft 700, and is formed in a columnar shape with a circular cross section. Guide projections 421 project from a plurality of locations (three in this embodiment) on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar body. Each guide projection 421 is a part for moving along the guide groove 715 (see FIG. 21) of the rotating shaft 700, and is formed in the same shape, and as shown in FIG. They are arranged at equal intervals in the direction (in this embodiment, at intervals of 120 degrees).

  The lower end of the elevating member 420 is formed in a conical shape coaxial with the columnar portion. This allows the lifting member 420 to be closer to the push-up member 410 on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 711 of the rotating shaft 700 (see FIG. 24), so that a limited space is provided on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 711. Can be effectively utilized, and the overall size can be reduced.

  FIG. 20 is a developed plan view in which the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 711 of the rotating shaft 700 is developed into a plane. Note that, in FIG. 20, reference numerals for the respective portions of the guide groove 715 are omitted for simplifying the drawing and facilitating understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the guide groove 715 is formed with a periodicity along the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 711 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 20). Specifically, the guide groove 715 has a shape in which a range XXb corresponding to a range of a central angle of 120 degrees is repeated in the circumferential direction (a shape in which three ranges XXb are arranged in the circumferential direction). Therefore, the three guide protrusions 421 of the lifting member 420 are guided by the guide grooves 715 in different ranges XXb.

  Next, referring to FIG. 21, the guide protrusion 421 of the elevating member 420 is guided by the guide groove 715, so that the elevating member 420 is held at the first position (interlocking position) or the second position (separation position). The structure will be described. In this description, FIG. 6 and FIGS. 22 to 26 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged development view in which the range XXb in FIG. 22 to 26 are cross-sectional views of the handle device 51. FIG. In FIGS. 22 and 23, as in FIG. 6, the cross-sectional views of the rotating shaft 700, the operating element 800, and the interlocking displacement unit 900 are omitted, while in FIGS. The child 800 and the interlocking displacement part 900 are viewed in cross section.

  FIGS. 6 and 24 correspond to a state in which the elevating member 420 is disposed at the first position (interlocking position) and the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be displaced in conjunction with the sliding operation of the operation element 800. FIG. 26 corresponds to a state in which the elevating member 420 is disposed at the second position (interlocking position) and the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the sliding operation of the operation element 800 (non-interlocking state). FIGS. 22 and 25 correspond to a state in which the operating element 800 is pressed down and the elevating member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position.

  As shown in FIG. 21, when the guide protrusion 421 is located at the position P1, the elevating member 420 is disposed at the first position (interlocking position). In this state, as shown in FIG. 24, the guide protrusion 421 is pressed against the first wall 715a of the guide groove 715 by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970, and is maintained at the position P1. In this state, as shown in FIG. 6, the step surface 711c of the rotary shaft 700 and the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 are engaged, so that when the operating element 800 is slid, the slide is performed. The interlocking displacement unit 900 is displaced in conjunction with the operation.

  When the operating element 800 is pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B) from a state in which the elevating member 420 is arranged at the first position (interlocking position) (see FIGS. 6 and 24), The lifting member 420 is pushed up by the lifting member 410. As a result, the guide protrusion 421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 715 (path L1), and hits the rising inclined wall portion 715b. When the operating element 800 is further pushed down and the elevating member 420 is pushed upward, the guide protrusion 421 is guided along the rising inclined wall portion 715b (path L2), and abuts on the guide regulating wall portion 715c at the position Pa. .

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 25, the operation of pressing down the operation element 800 cannot be performed. In this case, the leg 812 of the operation element 800 is pushed upward, and the elastic film member 893 is brought into close contact with the lower surface of the disk portion 621 of the intermediate base 620, so that the adhesion (frictional force) of the elastic film member 893 is used. Thus, the sliding movement of the operation element 800 can be restricted. That is, it is possible to suppress the operation element 800 that has been pressed down from being displaced in the sliding direction. As a result, the fixed position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be accurately fixed to the displacement position intended by the player.

  Further, as described above, the operation of pushing down the operation element 800 can be performed by the player without releasing a part of the finger holding the held portion 830 regardless of the slide position of the operation element 800. ,It can be carried out. Thereby, operability can be improved. Further, after performing the pressing operation of the operation element 800, it is easy to maintain the operation state (a state in which the slide operation amount of the operation element 800 is fixed to a desired slide operation amount). Therefore, the firing intensity of the game ball can be accurately fixed to a desired firing intensity.

  In addition, if the structure is such that the operating element 800 is pushed down, the player can be displaced downward only by the action of applying the weight of the hand as described above. That is, the player can maintain the pressing operation only by performing a simple operation of applying the weight of the hand, so that the player can reduce the fatigue of the player and reduce the firing intensity of the ball to the desired firing intensity. Can be fixed.

  Further, since the lower surface of the disk portion 621 of the intermediate base 620 is formed as a smooth surface, the operation amount (slide position) of the slide operation of the operation element 800 can be fixed at an arbitrary slide position. That is, even in a structure in which the saw-toothed members are engaged with each other, the position of the sliding operation can be firmly fixed in the same manner, but it is not possible to finely adjust the pitch of the sawtooth. On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the elastic film member 893 is brought into close contact with the smooth surface as in the present embodiment, it is possible to adjust to an arbitrary slide position and firmly fix the slide position.

  After the guide projection 421 abuts on the guide restricting wall 715c at the position Pa (see FIGS. 22 and 25), when the player looses the operating force, the downward pushing operation of the operating element 800 is released, and the push-up operation is performed. When the member 410 is lowered (see FIG. 26), the lifting member 420 is pressed down by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970. As a result, the guide projection 421 is moved down (path L3), hits the descending inclined wall 715d, is guided along the descending inclined wall 715d, and reaches the position P2 (path L4).

  When the guide protrusion 421 is located at the position P2, the elevating member 420 is arranged at the second position (separation position). In this state, as shown in FIG. 26, the guide protrusion 421 is pressed against the second wall 715e by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970, and is maintained at the position P2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 23, the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the step surface 711c of the rotation shaft unit 700, and the rotation shaft unit 700 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 are disengaged. Therefore, even if the operation element 800 is slid, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is not displaced. That is, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the operation element 800 and is fixed (maintained) at the separated position.

  When the operating element 800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B) from the state where the elevating member 420 is arranged at the second position (separation position) (see FIGS. 23 and 26), The lifting member 420 is pushed up by the lifting member 410. As a result, the guide protrusion 421 is raised (path L5) and hits the rising inclined wall portion 715f. When the operating element 800 is further pushed down and the elevating member 420 is pushed up, the guide protrusion 421 is guided along the rising inclined wall portion 715b (path L6) and abuts on the guide regulating wall portion 715g at the position Pb. .

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 25, the operation of pressing down the operation element 800 cannot be performed. When the player looses the operating force and releases the downward pushing operation of the operating element 800, thereby lowering the push-up member 410 (see FIG. 24), the lifting member 420 is attached to the pressing-direction urging spring 970. It is pushed down by the power. As a result, the guide protrusion 421 is moved down (path L7), hits the downward inclined wall 715h, is guided along the downward inclined wall 715h, and reaches the position P1 (path L8).

  Next, referring to FIGS. 27 and 28, the slide position of the operation element 800 is stored using the interlock displacement section 900, and the slide position of the operation element 800 is adjusted based on the interlock displacement section 900 (the original position). The adjustment method will be described.

  FIGS. 27A to 27D are schematic top views of the handle device 51. FIG. FIGS. 28A to 28D are schematic perspective views of the rotating shaft 700 and the interlocking displacement unit 900.

  27A corresponds to a state in which the operation element 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 are at the initial position Pmin, and FIG. 27B shows that the interlocking displacement unit 900 interlocks with the sliding operation of the operation element 800. FIG. 27C corresponds to a state in which the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed at a predetermined displacement position, and only the operation element 800 returns to the initial position Pmin. Corresponds to a state in which the operation element 800 is being slid toward the fixed position of the interlocking displacement unit 900.

  FIG. 28A corresponds to the state of FIGS. 27A and 27B (that is, the state in which the interlocking displacement unit 900 is displaced in conjunction with the sliding operation of the operation element 800), and FIG. FIG. 28B corresponds to the state of FIG. 27C (that is, the state in which the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed at the predetermined displacement position and only the operator 800 is returned to the initial position Pmin), and FIG. ) Corresponds to the state of FIG. 27D (that is, the state in which the operating element 800 is slid toward the fixed position of the interlocking displacement unit 900), and FIG. This corresponds to a state where the slide operation is performed past the position (the fixed position of the interlocking displacement unit 900).

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the elevating member 420 is at the first position (interlocking position) (see FIGS. 6 and 24), and the turning positions of the operation element 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 are located at the initial position Pmin. When the player performs a sliding operation of the operation element 800 in the direction of arrow I (see FIG. 5A) from the state of the operation, as shown in FIG. It is displaced in conjunction with the 800 slide operation.

  In this case, the rotating shaft 700 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 have their step surfaces 711c and 911c engaged with each other, and are integrally rotated as shown in FIG. . Therefore, the relative position between the elastic piece 790 of the rotating shaft 700 and the first protrusion 913 of the interlocking displacement unit 900 does not change.

  When the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted to a desired firing intensity as a result of adjusting the slide operation amount of the operating device 800 in accordance with the game state, the lower portion of the operating device 800 (in the direction of arrow G, FIG. 5B ), The lifting member 420 is set to the second position (separation position) (see FIGS. 23 and 26). As a result, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the operation unit 800, so that the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be fixed at a predetermined displacement position (position Pθ), and the operation unit 800 is independent of the interlocking displacement unit 900. Only the slide can be operated.

  That is, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 27B, if the operation of pushing down the operation element 800 is performed, the turning position of the operation element 800 is returned to the initial position to take a break, for example. Even if the game is interrupted, as shown in FIG. 27C, the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is maintained at the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position (position Pθ) before the interruption of the gaming machine) ( Fixed). Similarly, for example, even if the displacement position of the operation element 800 is slid to the maximum movable position Pmax in order to make a right strike, the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is held (fixed) at the original displacement position (position Pθ). )it can.

  Therefore, when adjusting the displacement position of the operation element 800 to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position before the game is interrupted or right-handed (the position Pθ)), the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed. Using the displacement position as a reference (target position), for example, as shown in FIG. 27D, the operator 800 is slid in the direction of arrow I toward the interlocking displacement unit 900, and the mark 894 of the operator 800 is interlocked. By matching with the displacement unit 900, the displacement position of the operation element 800 can be accurately and quickly adjusted to the original displacement position (position Pθ) (the original displacement position can be accurately and quickly reproduced).

  As described above, in the state where the interlocking displacement unit 900 is held (fixed) at the predetermined displacement position (position Pθ) and the slide position of the operation element 800 is returned to the initial position Pmin (FIG. 27C) 28), the elastic piece 790 of the rotating shaft 700 is circumferentially separated from the first protrusion 913 of the interlocking displacement part 900 as shown in FIG.

  As described above, since the first protrusion 913 is disposed on the movement locus of the elastic piece 790, the operating element 800 is slid in the direction of the arrow I toward the interlocking displacement section 900 (see FIG. 27D). When the sliding position of the operation element 800 approaches the displacement position (position Pθ) of the interlocking displacement section 900, the elastic piece 790 can get over the first protrusion 913 as shown in FIG. it can.

  That is, the operational feeling of the slide operation can be changed using the elastic deformation resistance of the elastic piece 790. As a result, even when the player does not keep track of the positional relationship between the mark 894 of the slide operator 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 visually, the change in the operational feeling causes the slide operator 800 to move to the target position (interlocking displacement unit). 900) can be recognized, and the operability of the slide operation can be improved.

  Here, for example, when the slide operator 800 is slid in the direction of the arrow I past the target position (the interlocking displacement unit 900) due to the carelessness of the player, as shown in FIG. The elastic piece 790 can get over the second protrusion 914. That is, the operational feeling of the slide operation can be changed using the elastic deformation resistance of the elastic piece 790. Therefore, even if the player does not keep track of the positional relationship between the mark 894 of the slide operator 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 visually, the change in the operational feeling causes the slide operator 800 to move to the target position (interlocking displacement unit 900). ) Can be recognized, and the operability of the slide operation can be improved.

  In particular, in this case, the disposition positions of the first protrusion 913 and the second protrusion 914 are set so as to be different in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 700, so that the elastic piece 790 gets over the first protrusion 913. The form of elastic deformation (elastic deformation resistance) of the elastic piece 790 can be made different from when the vehicle gets over the second protrusion 914. As a result, the operation feeling of the slide operation can be made different, so that the player can change the operation feeling without visually grasping the positional relationship between the slide operator 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900, for example. It can be distinguished whether the notification indicates that the vehicle has approached the target position or that the vehicle has passed the target position.

  Next, a handle device 2051 according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the pressing operation of the operation element 800 can be arbitrarily performed has been described. However, the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment does not operate the operation element 2800 unless a predetermined operation is performed. It is formed so that the pressing operation cannot be performed. The same portions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 29A is a side view of the operation element 2800 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 29B is a top view of the operation element 2800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIXb in FIG. 30A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator 2800 taken along the line XXXa-XXXa in FIG. 29B, and FIG. 30B is a manipulator 2800 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. It is the elements on larger scale sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the operation element 2800 according to the second embodiment, the insertion holes 2820 formed in the pair of legs 812 of the main body 810 are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body 810 (see FIG. a) A left and right direction) is formed in a long hole shape having a major axis direction. Specifically, it is formed by extending the insertion hole 820 in the first embodiment toward the base 811 side.

  It should be noted that the insertion hole 2820 has a short diameter (a vertical dimension in FIG. 29A) slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 990, and the connection shaft 990 can be displaced along the long diameter direction of the insertion hole 2820. You. Further, the connecting shaft 990 is fixed to the insertion hole 720 of the rotating shaft 700.

  FIG. 31 to FIG. 33 are cross-sectional views of the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment. FIG. 34A to FIG. 34C are side views of the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 2800. 34 (a), 34 (b) and 34 (c) correspond to partially enlarged views of the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 2800 in FIGS. 31, 32 and 33, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 34A, in the normal state, the operating element 2800 is configured such that the urging force of the flip-up direction urging spring 880 causes the held portion 830 to approach the rotating shaft 700 (FIG. 31). The connection shaft 990 is positioned at the end of the insertion hole 2820 on the held portion 830 side (the right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, in such a normal state, the position of the guide shaft 760 of the rotary shaft 700 is shifted with respect to the entrance of the guide groove 870 of the operator 2800 (see FIG. 34A), and the operator 2800 is moved downward (arrow). In the G direction, see FIG. 5B).

  In this case, the operator 2800 is displaced horizontally (in the direction of arrow B) in a direction away from the rotating shaft 700 (rightward in FIG. 32). That is, the player horizontally pulls the held portion 830 toward the player (toward the player). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 34B, the connecting shaft 990 is positioned at the end of the insertion hole 2820 on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 32) from the held portion 830, and the guide groove of the operation element 2800 is provided. The guide shaft 760 of the rotating shaft 700 can be disposed immediately below the entrance of the 870 (see FIG. 34B). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 (c), the operator 2800 can be pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5 (b)).

  As described above, according to the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, when the operation element 2800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (that is, when the operation of pulling the held portion 830 toward the near side is performed), the operation element 2800 It is possible to perform a downward pressing operation. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation element 2800 from being inadvertently pushed down.

  That is, since the operation of pressing down the operation element 2800 is in the direction of lowering the held portion 830 along the vertical direction, it is easy to use the weight of the hand, and therefore, as described above, the operation of pressing down is easy. However, there is a possibility that the pushing operation is performed carelessly and unintentionally. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the operation of pressing down the operation element 2800 requires that the operation element 2800 be displaced in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B). Inadvertent execution at a timing different from that described above can be reliably suppressed.

  Next, a handle device 3051 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which a predetermined operation must be performed in order to enable the operation member 2800 to be pressed down. However, the handle device 3051 according to the third embodiment includes the operation member 3800. The condition for enabling the push-down operation is to execute the predetermined operation a plurality of times. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are side views of the rotating shaft 700 and the operator 3800 in the third embodiment. Note that the same state is illustrated in FIGS. 35 (c) and 36 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, in the operation element 3800 in the third embodiment, the guide groove 3870 is formed in a Z-shape in a side view. That is, in the side view shown in FIG. 35A, the guide groove 3870 extends from the entrance on the lower surface side of the main body 810 toward the upper surface of the main body 810, and then is folded back toward the lower surface. At the same time, it is folded again toward the upper surface side to be formed.

  As shown in FIG. 35A, in the normal state, the urging force of the flip-up direction urging spring 880 causes the held part 830 to rotate the held part 830 in the rotation shaft 700 in the normal state, as in the case of the second embodiment. 35 (a), the connecting shaft 990 is positioned at the end of the insertion hole 2820 on the held portion 830 side (the right side in FIG. 35 (a)). You. Therefore, in such a normal state, the position of the guide shaft 760 of the rotary shaft 700 is shifted with respect to the entrance of the guide groove 3870 of the operation element 3800, and the operation element 3800 is moved downward (in the direction of arrow G, FIG. 5B). See)).

  In the third embodiment, the operator 3800 is displaced horizontally (arrow B direction) in a direction away from the rotating shaft 700 (rightward in FIG. 35B) while being pushed down. That is, the player horizontally pulls the held portion 830 toward the player (on the player side) while pushing the held portion 830 downward. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the guide shaft 760 of the rotary shaft 700 is disposed immediately below the entrance of the guide groove 3870 of the operation element 3800, the guide shaft 760 is inserted into the guide groove 3870. As shown in FIGS. 35 (c) and 36 (a), the operating element 3800 is displaced downward (in the direction of the push-down operation) until the guide shaft 760 reaches the first folded portion of the guide groove 3870 as shown in FIGS. Is done.

  After the state shown in FIGS. 35 (c) and 36 (a) is formed, the operator 3800 is horizontally moved (in the direction of arrow B) in a direction away from the rotating shaft 700 (rightward in FIG. 36 (a)). Is further displaced. That is, the player further horizontally pulls the held portion 830 toward the player (toward the player). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 36B, the guide shaft 760 can be disposed at the second turn-down portion of the guide groove 3870, and as shown in FIG. It can be pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B).

  As described above, according to the handle device 3051 in the third embodiment, the operation element 3800 is displaced in the horizontal direction a plurality of times (specifically, twice) (that is, toward the front side of the held portion 830). In the case where the pulling operation is performed a plurality of times), it is possible to perform the pressing operation of the operating element 3800 to the specified position. Thereby, it is possible to more reliably prevent the operation element 3800 from being inadvertently pushed down.

  That is, even if the displacement of the operation element 3800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the near side) itself is an unintended operation that is not intended by the player, the operation element can be operated only by one operation. The push-down operation to the specified position of 3800 is not completed, and furthermore, from that state, the displacement of the operating element 3800 in the horizontal direction (pulling operation toward the near side) needs to be performed again. Therefore, since the second horizontal displacement needs to be consciously performed by the player, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from inadvertently performing an undesired pressing operation.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching of whether or not the interlocking displacement unit 900 is interlocked with the sliding displacement of the operation element 800 is performed by a downward operation of the operation element 800. In the embodiment, the switching is performed by the displacement of the operation element 4800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the player). Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 37A and 37B are partial cross-sectional side views of an operator 4800 and a rotating shaft 700 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 37A shows a state in which the operator 4800 is at an initial position. FIG. 37B corresponds to a state in which the operation element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (pulling operation toward the player).

  As shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, the operation element 4800 in the fourth embodiment is connected to the rotation shaft 700 via a connection shaft 4990. As a result, similarly to the first embodiment, the operation element 4800 rotates integrally with the rotation shaft 700 around the axis of the rotation shaft 700 to thereby slide in the sliding direction (the arrow I and the arrow I). While the displacement (slide operation) in the direction D (see FIG. 5A) is possible, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (the direction toward the player). (Pulling operation) is possible.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 37A, in the normal state, the operating force of the flip-up biasing spring 880 causes the operating member 4800 to move the held portion 830 closer to the rotating shaft 700 (see FIG. a) (left direction), and by displacing the held portion 830 horizontally in the direction of arrow B (pulling the player side) against the biasing force, the holding portion 830 is moved toward the player side as shown in FIG. ). In this state, when the operation force in the direction of arrow B is relaxed, the operation element 4800 is displaced horizontally in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow B by the elastic recovery force of the spring 880 in the flip-up direction. The state is returned to the state shown in a).

  In the first embodiment, the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 800 are connected by one connecting shaft 990. However, the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 4800 of the fourth embodiment are connected by two connecting shafts 4990. Are linked by That is, one connection shaft 4990 of the two connection shafts 4990 connects one leg portion 812 of the pair of leg portions 812 and one insertion hole 720 of the rotation shaft portion 700, and the other. The connecting shaft 4990 connects the other leg 812 of the pair of legs 812 to the other through hole 720 of the rotating shaft 700. Accordingly, a space for moving the cam member 860 is secured between the two connection shafts 4990.

  FIG. 38 (a) is a side view of the operation element 4800, and FIG. 38 (b) is a top view of the operation element 4800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38 (a). 39A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator 4800 taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38B, and FIG. 39B is a manipulator 4800 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 38B. It is the elements on larger scale sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the operation element 4800 according to the fourth embodiment, the insertion holes 4820 formed in the pair of legs 812 of the main body 810 are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body 810 (see FIG. a) A left and right direction) is formed in a long hole shape having a major axis direction. It should be noted that the insertion hole 4820 has a short diameter (a vertical dimension in FIG. 38A) slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 4990, and the connection shaft 4990 can be displaced along the long diameter direction of the insertion hole 4820. You. The connecting shaft 4990 is fixed to the insertion hole 720 of the rotating shaft 700.

  The cam member 4860 is a member for pushing up the push-up member 410 upward (see FIG. 37). The cam member 4860 is a flat plate-shaped bridge portion 4861 bridged between the pair of legs 812 and the bridge portion 4861. A push-up cam 4862 extending from the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 38B) toward the base 811 side (that is, the side where the rotating shaft 700 is disposed, the right side in FIG. 38B); These are integrally formed.

  The push-up cam 4862 is formed in a triangular shape in a sectional view, and is disposed with a triangular top portion facing upward as shown in FIG. In a state where the rotating shaft 700 is connected to the main body 810 (between the pair of legs 812) via the connecting shaft 4990, the push-up cam 4862 has the triangular top formed by the rotation shaft of the push-up member 410 ( The protrusion 731 and the concave portion 411 (see FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (c)) are disposed at positions that support the rear surface, which is the lower side in the vertical direction, from below (see FIG. 37 (a)).

  When the operation member 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B, see FIG. 37A), the cam member 4860 pushes up the triangular top (the upper side in FIG. 39A) of the push-up cam 4862. 37, while being displaced in the horizontal direction while being in contact with the rear surface of the push-up member 410, the push-up member 410 is pushed upward (see FIGS. 37A and 37B).

  In this manner, the push-up cam 4862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross-section, and the top is used to push up the push-up member 410, so that the operator 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (arrow B direction). In a normal state (see FIG. 37 (a)), the push-up member 410 can be arranged further downward, and the size in the overall height direction (axial direction, FIG. 37 (a) vertical direction) can be reduced. When the operation element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (pulling operation toward the front side) (see FIG. 37B), an upward pushing amount of the push-up member 410 can be secured, so that the operation element 4800 is required. In addition, the operability can be improved by reducing the amount of displacement in the horizontal direction, and the up / down stroke of the lifting / lowering member 420 (see FIG. 19) can be increased so that the interlocking / non-interlocking Off It can be performed instead reliably (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, the lifting member 420 is moved to the first position (interlocking position) or the second position (separation position) by the displacement of the operation element 4800 in the horizontal direction (pulling operation toward the near side). The structure for switching to is described.

  40 to 42 are cross-sectional views of the handle device 4051. FIG. 40 corresponds to a state in which the elevating member 420 is arranged at the first position (interlocking position), and FIG. 42 shows a state in which the elevating member 420 is arranged at the second position (interlocking position) (non-interlocking state). ). FIG. 41 corresponds to a state in which the operating element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the near side) and the elevating member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position.

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the elevating member 420 is located at the first position (interlocking position), the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be displaced in conjunction with the sliding operation of the operation element 4800. In this state, when the operation element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the front side), the push-up cam 4862 of the cam member 4860 is moved via the push-up member 410 as shown in FIG. The lifting member 420 is pushed upward, and the lifting member 420 is disposed at an intermediate position.

  When the player looses the operation force from the state shown in FIG. 41 and the displacement of the operation element 4800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the front side) is released, the operation element 4800 jumps up. With the urging force of the urging spring 880, it is pulled back in the direction opposite to the arrow B direction, and the elevating member 420 is pushed down by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970. As a result, as shown in FIG. 42, the elevating member 420 is located at the second position (separation position).

  In the state shown in FIG. 42, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the sliding operation of the operation element 4800, the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the step surface 711c of the rotating shaft unit 700, and the interlocking displacement with the rotating shaft unit 700 is performed. Since the part 900 is disengaged, the interlocking displacement part 900 is not displaced even if the operator 4800 is slid. That is, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the operator 4800, and is fixed (maintained) at the separated position.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, the operation element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (arrow B direction) (pulling operation toward the player side) from the state in which the elevating member 420 is disposed at the second position (separation position). Then, as shown in FIG. 41, the push-up cam 4862 of the cam member 4860 pushes the elevating member 420 upward through the pushing-up member 410, and the elevating member 420 is disposed at an intermediate position.

  In this state (ie, in a state where the elevating member 420 shown in FIG. 42 is arranged at the second position (separation position), the operating element 4800 is pulled toward the near side, and the elevating member 420 is arranged at the intermediate position). Then, when the player looses the operating force and the displacement of the operation element 4800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the front side) is released, the operation element 4800 raises the spring 880 With the urging force, the lifting member 420 is pulled back in the direction opposite to the arrow B direction, and the lifting member 420 is pushed down by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970. As a result, as shown in FIG. 40, the lifting member 420 is disposed at the first position (interlocking position).

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is interlocked with the sliding displacement of the operator 4800 by the displacement of the operator 4800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the front side). Can be switched. That is, an operation for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball and an operation for fixing the interlocking displacement unit 900 to a predetermined displacement position (to store the displacement position) are performed by holding the held unit 830. It is not necessary to re-grip the finger or perform the button operation with the opposite hand, and the operation can be easily performed with one hand while maintaining the state of holding the held portion 830 of the operation element 4800.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. 43 (a) is a top view of the handle device 5051 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 43 (b) is a side view of the handle device 5051 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIIIb in FIG. 43 (a). FIG. 44 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 5051.

  In the first embodiment, a rod-shaped held portion 830 is formed on an operating element 800 for adjusting the firing intensity of a game ball by changing the slide displacement amount, and the operated element 830 is gripped by a hand to operate the operating element 800. Although the case of performing the sliding operation or the pushing-down operation of the above has been described, the operating element 5800 in the fifth embodiment includes the held portion 5800 on which the mounting surface 5831 is formed, and is provided on the mounting surface 5831 of the held portion 5800. A part of the hand is placed and a sliding operation or a pressing operation of the operation element 5800 is performed. That is, even when it is difficult to grip the operated portion 830 due to inconvenience of the hand, the sliding operation and the pressing operation can be performed, and the game can be performed.

  Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in each embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted. The handle device 5051 according to the fifth embodiment has the same other configuration as the handle device 51 according to the first embodiment except that the configuration of an operator 5800 is different from that of the operator 800 according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, in the operation element 5800 in the fifth embodiment, a held part 5830 is provided on the distal end side (the right side in FIG. 43A) of the main body part 810. The held portion 5830 is erected from a mounting surface 5831 formed by dividing an elliptical shape into two along its short axis in a top view, and an arc-shaped outer edge portion of the mounting surface 5831 in a top view. And an upright wall 5832.

  The placement surface 5831 is a flat surface on which the player places a part of the hand, and is formed as a flat surface parallel to the slide plane of the operation element 5800. By moving the hand placed on the placement surface 5831 in the horizontal direction, when the operator 5800 slides, the inner peripheral surface of the standing wall 5832 receives the hand in the horizontal direction.

  According to the handle device 5051 in the fifth embodiment, since the placement surface 5831 on which the player can place a part of the hand is formed on the held portion 5830 of the operation element 5800, for example, fingers are not Even if the player cannot freely hold the bar-shaped held portion 830 (see FIG. 5) because of freedom, the player can use the placing surface 5831 of the held portion 5830 to move the operating element 5800 in the left-right direction ( It is possible to perform a sliding operation in the directions of arrows I and D and a pressing operation downward (in the direction of arrow G).

  That is, in a conventional gaming machine that adjusts the firing strength of a game ball by gripping and rotating a rotating handle from the front, it is impossible for a player who has difficulty with fingers to play a game. Even when the held portion 800 is formed in a rod shape as in the embodiment, it is difficult to hold the held portion 830 and play a game. According to the present invention, a player who has difficulty in fingers can play a game for the first time by allowing the operator 5800 to be slidable left and right and pressed down.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration of one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  A game machine comprising an operation device operated by a player, wherein the firing intensity of a game ball is adjusted according to an operation amount of the operation device, wherein the operation device includes a held portion held by the player. An operator provided on one side and supported on the other side so that the held portion can be slidably displaced, wherein the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of slide displacement of the held portion, and A gaming machine A1 which is formed so that a player can recognize the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion with reference to the member (1).

  According to the gaming machine A1, the operator has the held portion held by the player on one side and the other side is supported so that the held portion can be slid and displaced. In other words, it is possible to improve the operability when adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. In this case, it is possible for the player to recognize the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion based on the predetermined member. Therefore, after the operation element is adjusted to the displacement position at which the emission intensity of the game ball becomes the desired emission intensity, for example, in order to interrupt the game, the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element is shifted to the initial position. When the player is returned, or, for example, when the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element is changed to the maximum displacement position in order to make a right-handed hit, the player may release the predetermined member. Based on the recognition of the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion as a reference, the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion is changed to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position before interrupting the game or right-handing). It can be adjusted (restored). Therefore, the operation of adjusting the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position can be performed accurately and quickly.

  Note that the held portion held by the player is not limited to a shape that the player can hold with his / her fingers. For example, a shape that allows the player to place the palm or back of the hand is exemplified. Examples of the structure that supports the other side of the operation element include a structure that rotatably supports the other side of the operation element and a structure that supports the other side of the operation element so as to be displaceable along the guide groove. . The structure for supporting the shaft is not limited to the structure for rotatably supporting only one shaft, and may be a structure for supporting the shaft movably (for example, a structure in which a spherical body is held by a spherical bearing). In the structure for supporting along the guide groove, the guide groove may be linear, may be curved, or may be a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operating device includes an interlocking displacement portion formed so as to be displaceable in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, and the interlocking displacement portion is configured to slide the interlocked displacement portion of the operation element A game machine A2, comprising: interlock canceling means for canceling displacement in conjunction with.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, it is possible to cancel the displacement of the interlocking displacement portion in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element by the interlocking release means. That is, the interlocking disengagement means releases the interlocking displacement unit from interlocking with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, thereby separating the interlocking displacement unit from the sliding displacement of the held element of the operation element. It can be kept (fixed) at the displaced position when separated. Thereby, in a state in which the operating element is adjusted to the displacement position at which the firing intensity of the game ball becomes the desired firing intensity, the interlocking disengagement unit releases the interlocking displacement unit so that the interlocking displacement unit remains at the predetermined displacement position ( Fixed), and can be used as a reference when adjusting (returning) the operation element to the original displacement position. Therefore, when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position, the adjustment operation can be performed accurately and quickly.

  In the gaming machine A2, the operator is supported on the other side, and is rotated about the supported other side, thereby causing the held player on one side to slide and displace. The interlocking displacement portion is configured to slide and displace one side by rotating the other side coaxially with the operation element and being rotated about the other side supported by the shaft, A gaming machine A3, wherein a movement trajectory of the interlocking displacement portion on the one side overlaps with a movement trajectory of the operation element in a top view.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the operator and the interlocking displacement portion are configured such that the other side thereof is coaxially supported and rotated about the other side so that one side is provided. The sliding trajectories on one side overlap in a top view, so that the player can easily grasp the relative positional relationship between these operators and the interlocking displacement unit.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a mark indicating a relative position between the operation element and the interlocking displacement section is provided on at least one of the operation element and the interlocking displacement section. A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a mark is formed on at least one of the operator and the interlocking displacement part, so that the displacement of the sliding displacement of the held part of the operator is provided. When adjusting the position to the original displacement position, a mark can be used as a reference. Therefore, the adjustment operation (return operation) of the operation element to the original displacement position can be performed accurately and promptly.

  In addition, a mark is formed on each of the operation element and the interlocking displacement section, and in a state in which the interlocking displacement section is displaced in conjunction with the slide displacement of the held section of the operation element, the mark of the operation element and the mark of the interlocking displacement section are provided. Are preferably the same. In this case, when adjusting (returning) the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position, the mark of the operation element may be made to coincide with the mark of the interlocking displacement section. The adjustment operation to the original displacement position can be performed accurately and quickly.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, one of the operation element and the interlocking displacement section includes an engaged portion, and the other of the operation element and the interlocking displacement section can engage with the engaged section. An engaging portion, wherein the engaged portion and the engaging portion are engaged with each other, so that the interlocking displacement portion can be displaced in conjunction with a sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, and A gaming machine A5, wherein the engagement between the engaged portion and the engaging portion can be released by the interlocking release means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the interlocking displacing portion causes the sliding displacement of the retained portion of the operation element by the engagement between the engaged portion and the engaging portion. In this case, the displacement of the interlocking displacement portion is caused by slippage compared to the case where the interlocking displacement portion is displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element by, for example, a frictional force. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement of the interlocking displacement unit can accurately follow the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, the operation element is adjusted (returned) to the original displacement position based on the interlocking displacement unit. Can be adjusted to a more accurate displacement position.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game machine further includes a coupling member that couples the operation element and the interlocking displacement section, and the coupling member couples the operation element and the interlocking displacement section. A game machine A6 characterized in that the movable member can be displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion, and the coupling of the operating element and the coupled displacement portion by the coupling member can be released by the coupled release means. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the coupling member couples the operation element and the interlocking displacement section, so that the interlocking displacement section reduces the sliding displacement of the held section of the operation element. Since it is possible to be displaced in conjunction with each other, the displacement of the interlocking displacement portion due to slippage is smaller than that in the case where the interlocking displacement portion is displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operator, for example, by frictional force. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement of the interlocking displacement portion can accurately follow the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation member, more accurate adjustment of the operation member to the original displacement position based on the interlocking displacement portion is performed. It can be adjusted to a suitable displacement position.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the operation element is formed such that the held portion can be displaced in a second direction different from a direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, The interlock release means is formed so that the held portion of the operation element is displaced in the second direction, so that the interlocking displacement section can be released from being displaced in conjunction with the operation element. A gaming machine A7 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the held portion is displaced in the second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the gaming ball. Since the release is performed by the interlock release means, the release operation can be easily performed. That is, the player displaces the held portion of the operation element in the direction of the slide displacement, adjusts the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then moves the held portion in the second direction from that state. It is sufficient to perform an operation of displacing, and in order to release by the interlock release means, it is necessary to perform an operation of holding the held part and an operation of operating another operating means with a hand opposite to the hand that operates the held part. There is no. As a result, an operation (release operation) for performing release by the interlock release unit can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine A7, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction for displacing the held portion along a horizontal direction, and the second direction is a direction for lowering the held portion along a vertical direction. A gaming machine A8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the direction in which the held portion of the operation element is displaced is such that the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball is such that the held portion is in the horizontal direction. Since the second direction for releasing by the interlock release means is the direction of lowering the held portion along the vertical direction, the direction of the sliding displacement of the held portion is The operation for releasing by the interlock release means (release operation) can be easily performed while maintaining the operation amount (that is, suppressing the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement).

  That is, the player performs an operation of displacing the held portion of the operation element in the direction of the slide displacement, adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then displacing the held portion in the second direction. In this case, the held portion can be easily displaced in the second direction only by applying the weight of the hand to the held portion, or by simply turning the wrist downward. As a result, the operation for canceling by the interlock canceling unit while maintaining the operation amount of the held portion in the direction of the slide displacement (that is, suppressing the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement) ( Release operation) can be easily performed.

  Note that the direction of the slide displacement does not need to be parallel to the horizontal direction. That is, the expression that the direction of the slide displacement is along the horizontal direction means that a range of an inclination angle of ± 60 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction is an allowable range. That is, it is not necessary to be completely horizontal, and part or all of the trajectory of the slide displacement may be inclined downward or upward. Further, the slide displacement is not limited to the form in which the locus is linear, but includes a form in which all or a part of the locus is curved in an arc shape. If the trajectory is curved in an arc, the tangential direction is the direction of the slide displacement.

  Here, in the gaming machine A7, the second direction is the direction along the horizontal direction and the front-rear direction of the gaming machine (that is, the direction in which the held portion of the operation element is directed from the front surface of the gaming machine to the player, or (A direction from the player toward the front of the gaming machine). According to this configuration, it is also possible to maintain the operation amount of the held portion in the direction of the slide displacement (that is, to suppress the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement) and to perform the release by the interlock release means. The operation (release operation) can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine A8, the release by the interlocking release means of the interlocking displacement portion being displaced in conjunction with the operation element is performed when the displacement of the held portion in the second direction is performed a plurality of times. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being performed.

  In the gaming machine A8, a second operation portion formed so as to be operable by a player is provided, and the disengagement of the interlocking displacing portion in conjunction with the operation element by the interlocking release means is released by the second operation portion. The gaming machine A10, which is carried out by operating the second operation portion or simultaneously with operating the second operation portion, by displacing the held portion in the second direction.

  In the gaming machine A8, the holding portion is formed so as to be displaceable in a third direction different from the second direction, and after being displaced in the third direction, the holding portion is moved in the second direction. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable.

  According to any one of the gaming machines A9 to A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the release by the interlocking release means of the displacement of the interlocking displacement unit in conjunction with the operating element is affected by the second direction. When the displacement of the holding portion is performed a plurality of times, when the held portion is displaced in the second direction after operating the second operation portion or simultaneously with the operation of the second operation portion, or in the third direction. Since this is performed when the held portion is displaced in the second direction after being displaced, the held portion of the operation element is inadvertently operated in the second direction, and the firing intensity differs from the intention of the player. In addition, it is possible to suppress the release by the interlock release unit. That is, since the second direction is a direction of descending along the vertical direction, as described above, it is easy to use the weight of the hand, and therefore, the operation of the held portion in the second direction is easy. On the other hand, where there is a possibility that the held portion may be inadvertently operated in the second direction, the displacement of the held portion in the second direction is performed a plurality of times as in any of the gaming machines A9 to A11. That the held portion is displaced in the second direction after operating the second operation portion or simultaneously with the operation of the second operation portion, or the held portion is displaced in the third direction after being displaced in the third direction. By displacing in the direction of 2, the inadvertent execution of the release by the interlock release means with a firing intensity different from the player's intention can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A8 to A11, when the held portion of the operation element is displaced in the second direction, the release by the interlock release means is performed, and the holding section of the operation element is moved by the slide. A gaming machine A12 formed so as to be able to regulate displacement in the direction of displacement.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A8 to A11, the held portion of the operation element is displaced in the second direction, so that the release by the interlock release means is performed, and the operation is performed. The movable portion is formed so as to be able to restrict the displacement of the held portion of the operator in the direction of the slide displacement. Restriction of displacement of the holding portion in the direction of slide displacement can also be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element from being shifted from the intended predetermined displacement position. As a result, it is possible to appropriately keep (fix) the interlocking displacement portion at the predetermined displacement position. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A12, the operation element is formed such that the held portion can be displaced in a second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, In a state in which the interlocking displacing portion is disengaged by the interlocking release means from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, the held portion of the operation element displaces in the second direction. The gaming machine A13, wherein the interlocking displacement portion is displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A12, the held portion is displaced in the second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. Since the return from the release by the interlock release means (return from the non-interlocking state to the interlocking state of the interlocking displacement with respect to the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element) is performed, such a returning operation can be easily performed. . That is, in order to return from the release by the interlock release unit (return operation), an operation of holding the held unit or an operation of operating another operation unit with a hand opposite to the hand that operates the held unit is performed. No need. As a result, an operation (return operation) for returning from the release by the interlock release unit can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine A13, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction for displacing the held portion in the horizontal direction, and the second direction is a direction for lowering the held portion in the vertical direction. A gaming machine A14 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A13, the direction in which the held portion of the operation element is displaced is such that the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball is such that the held portion is in the horizontal direction. Since the second direction for returning from the release by the interlock release means is the direction in which the held portion is lowered along the vertical direction, the direction from the release by the interlock release means is The operation for performing the return (return operation) can be easily performed. That is, the operation of displacing the held portion in the second direction can be easily performed only by applying the weight of the hand to the held portion or returning the wrist downward.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A14, the displacement of the interlocking displacing portion released from the interlocking disengaging means by the interlocking disengaging means is prevented from being displaced interlockingly with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operator. A gaming machine A15 characterized in that when the displaced position of the held portion approaches, the operation resistance when the held portion of the operation element is slid is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A14, the displacement of the interlocking displacing portion released by the interlocking disengaging means from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element is released. When the displacement position of the held portion of the operation element is close to the position, the operation resistance when the held portion of the operation element is slid is changed, so that the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element is changed. When adjusting the displacement position to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit), even if the relative positional relationship between the interlocking displacement unit and the held portion of the operation element is not continuously observed, The player can recognize that the held portion of the operation element has approached the original displacement position based on the change in the operation resistance due to the slide displacement. Thus, it is possible to improve operability and reduce labor when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A15, a displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion released from being interlocked with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element by the interlocking release means is the interlocking displacement portion. A game machine A16 characterized in that, when the held portion of the operation element passes through the displacement position of the operation element, the operation resistance when the held element of the operation element is slid is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A15, the displacement of the interlocking displacing portion released by the interlocking disengaging means to be displaced in conjunction with the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element is released. When the held portion of the operation element passes through the displacement position of the interlocking displacement section with respect to the position, the operation resistance at the time of slidingly displacing the held portion of the operation element changes. When adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion), the relative positional relationship between the interlocking displacement portion and the held portion of the operation element must be continuously observed. However, the player can recognize that the held portion of the operation element has passed the original displacement position based on the change in the operation resistance due to the slide displacement. Thus, it is possible to improve operability and reduce labor when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position.

  In the gaming machine A16, the displacement of the held portion of the operation element relative to the displacement position of the interlocking displacement section released by the interlocking release means from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held section of the operation element. A change in the operation resistance when the held portion of the operation element is slid and displaced when the position is approached, and the change of the operation element when the held portion of the operation element passes the displacement position of the interlocking displacement section. A gaming machine A17, wherein a change in operation resistance when the held portion is slid is different.

  According to the gaming machine A17, the displacement of the operation element in the interlocking displacement section released by the interlocking release means is prevented from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held section of the operation element. It is assumed that the change in the operation resistance when the held portion approaches and the change in the operation resistance when the held portion of the operation element passes through the displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion are different from each other. Even if the relative positional relationship between the operator and the held part is not visually recognized, it is possible to determine whether the held part of the operation element has approached the original displacement position or has passed the original displacement position. Can be recognized. Thus, it is possible to improve operability and reduce labor when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position.

  Examples of the form in which the change in the operational feeling is different include, for example, a form in which the absolute value of the force required for the operation is different, a form in which the manner of change in the force required for the operation is different, and a form in which these forms are combined. You.

  Here, as a structure for forming a change in operation feeling, for example, one of a projection and a deformed body is provided on the operation element side, and a projection is formed on a member that is displaced relative to the operation element with the operation of the operation element. Or, the other of the deformed bodies is provided, and the deformable body is elastically deformed and returned to the initial shape by the operation of the operation element, by causing the deformable body to move over the projection, and the deformed body is deformed. A structure in which a change in operating force is formed by using a change in force is exemplified. According to this, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, as a structure for making a change in the operation force when approaching a predetermined position (a displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion) different from a change in the operation force when passing through the predetermined position, the deformable body is cantilevered. In addition to the rod-shaped body, the position of the rod-shaped body over the projection is made different (that is, a form in which the root side of the cantilevered rod-like body goes over the projection and a form in which the tip side of the rod-like body gets over the projection are formed). A structure that changes the change in force is exemplified. According to this, the change of the operating force can be made much different between the two, and the rod-shaped body can be used both when approaching and when passing, so that the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly and the product cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A17, the operation element is formed such that the held portion can be displaced in a second direction different from a direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, A gaming machine A18 wherein a predetermined operation is performed by displacing the held portion of the operation element in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A17, the player performs an operation for performing a predetermined operation (an operation of displacing the held portion of the operation element in the second direction). Can be easily performed while minimizing the change of the posture. Note that the predetermined operation includes, for example, stopping the launch of the game ball, changing (increase or decrease) the launch intensity of the game ball, and restricting the return of the operation element to the initial position (in the direction of the slide displacement of the held portion). Prohibition of displacement or suppression of displacement). In a gaming machine such as the gaming machine A3 having an interlocking displacement unit and an interlocking release unit, both the predetermined operation and the release by the interlocking release unit are performed by the displacement of the held portion in the second direction. It may be made to be done. In this case, two operations of an operation for performing a predetermined operation and an operation for performing release by the interlock release unit are performed simultaneously by one operation of displacing the held portion in the second direction. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A18, the held portion of the operation element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by a player.

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effect of the gaming machines A1 to A18, the held portion of the operation element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by the player, so that the held portion can be easily held. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when the held portion is operated in a predetermined direction (for example, the direction of the slide displacement or the second direction).

  In the gaming machine A19, the operation element includes a main body portion in which the held portion is connected to one side and the other side is slidably supported, and the held portion is vertically moved from one side of the main body portion. And the held portion is formed so as to be displaceable in a second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, A gaming machine wherein the direction of displacement is a direction for displacing the held portion along a horizontal direction, and the second direction is a direction for lowering the held portion along a vertical direction. A20.

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A19, the held portion is erected upward from one side of the main body in the vertical direction, so that the held portion is held in a natural posture by the player. The holding portion can be held (gripped), and the held portion can be easily operated in the horizontal direction of the sliding displacement and the vertical direction in the second direction. In particular, since the held portion is erected from one side of the main body portion, when gripping the held portion, the outer edge of the palm can be placed on the main body portion, thereby reducing fatigue. When displacing (falling) in the second direction, the weight of the hand can be applied to the main body, and the operation can be facilitated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, a button member which is pushed by a player to perform a predetermined operation is provided, and the button member is disposed on a held portion of the operation element. Gaming machine A21.

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, the gaming machine A21 includes a button member that is pushed by a player to perform a predetermined operation, and the button member is a held portion of the operator. Therefore, the operation for performing the predetermined operation (the pressing operation of the button member) can be easily performed while minimizing the change in the posture of the player. Note that the predetermined operation includes, for example, stopping the launch of the game ball, changing (increase or decrease) the launch intensity of the game ball, and restricting the return of the operation element to the initial position (in the direction of the slide displacement of the held portion). Prohibition of displacement or suppression of displacement).

  The gaming machine A22 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A21, wherein the held portion of the operation element includes a placing surface formed in a shape in which a player can place a part of a hand.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A21, the held portion of the operation element has a mounting surface formed in a shape that allows a player to place a part of a hand. With this arrangement, for example, even a player who cannot grip the operation portion can operate the held portion in the direction of sliding displacement by using the mounting surface of the held portion. That is, in the conventional gaming machine in which the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted by rotating the rotary handle, it is difficult for a player who cannot grasp the operation portion to play a game. By adopting a structure in which the holding part is formed so as to be slidable and the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of sliding displacement of the held part, it is possible for a player who cannot grasp the operation part to play for the first time. It has become.

  The gaming machine A23 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A22, wherein the held portion of the operation element is slid and displaced in a direction in which it is gradually lowered and inclined from an initial position.

  According to the gaming machine A23, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A22, the held portion of the operation element is slid in the direction of being gradually lowered and inclined from the initial position. The operation in the direction of increasing the amount (that is, the operation of increasing the firing intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed by using the weight of the hand. In addition, when the firing intensity of the game ball is kept constant, the weight of the hand can be used to counteract the urging force for returning the held portion of the operation element to the initial position, so that the fatigue of the player can be reduced. . Note that this configuration is used when the player needs to perform the slide displacement using the mounting surface of the held portion as in the gaming machine A21 (that is, when the player cannot grip the held portion). Especially effective.

  The gaming machine B1 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine B2 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the pachinko gaming machine has a handle device as a basic configuration, and fires a ball to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the handle device, and the ball is provided at an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine B3 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
51, 2051, 3051, 4051, 5051 Handle device (operating device)
700 Rotating shaft part (part of operator)
711c Step surface (engaging portion or engaged portion, connecting member)
800, 2800, 3800, 4800, 5800 Operator 810 Main body 830, 5830 Held portion 5831 Mounting surface 894 Mark 900 Interlocking displacement portion 911c Step surface (engaged portion or engaging portion, coupling member)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a handle rotating portion is rotatably attached to a handle base, and the firing intensity of a ball is adjusted in accordance with a rotating operation amount of the handle rotating portion. In addition, when the desired firing strength is obtained by the turning operation of the handle turning unit, the turning of the handle turning unit is fixed to maintain the firing intensity and reduce the fatigue of the player. Some structures have

JP 2012-005759 A

  An urging force by an urging spring is applied to the operation element (handle rotating portion), and when the player releases his / her hand, the operation position of the operation element returns to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when the game is interrupted, it is difficult to adjust the operation position of the operating element to the original operation position before the interruption of the game.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily adjust an operation position of an operation element to an original operation position.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation device operated by a player, and the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the operation device. The operating device has an operator that has a held portion held by the player on one side and has the other side supported so that the held portion can be slidably displaced, and a sliding displacement of the held portion of the operator. an interlocking displacement portion which is rotated displaceably formed in conjunction with, and interlock canceling means for canceling that the interlocking displacement portion is rotationally displaced in synchronization with the sliding displacement of the holding portion of the operating element, the interlocking Fixing means for fixing the interlocking displacement part at a displacement position where the interlocking of the operation element with the held part is released by the releasing means, and the firing intensity of the game ball according to the sliding displacement of the held part There is adjusted, the fixed hand Player as a reference the interlocking displacement portion fixed is recognizable form a displacement position of the slide displacement of the held part by the fixing means comprises a first member and a second member, which first The interlocking displacement portion can be fixed by sandwiching the interlocking displacement portion from the rotation axis direction of the interlocking displacement portion between the member and the second member, and the operation element is fixed to the interlocking displacement portion by the fixing means. A fixing release means for releasing the fixing of the portion, wherein the held portion is formed so as to be displaceable in a second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, and the interlock release means that the held portion of the operating element is displaced in the second direction, the interlocking displacement portion is releasably formed to be displaced in conjunction with the operator, said unlocking means Is the holding of the operator A push-up member that is displaceable in conjunction with the displacement in the second direction, and is disposed so as to be displaceable by the displacement of the push-up member, and the displacement displaces the first member or the second member. An elevating member capable of releasing the fixation of the interlocking displacement portion by the first member and the second member, wherein the interlocking displacement portion is fixed to the first member and the second member. When the held portion is displaced in the second direction, the push-up member and the elevating member are displaced, and the fixing of the interlocking displacement portion by the first member and the second member is released. An interlocking displacement unit is interlocked with the operator .

According to claim 1 the gaming machine described in the operation for adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the steering Sakuko to the original displacement position can be performed accurately and quickly.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5A is a top view of the handle device, and FIG. 5B is a side view of the handle device as viewed in the direction of the arrow Vb in FIG. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device taken along the line VI-VI in FIG. 7A is a side view of the lower base, FIG. 7B is a top view of the lower base as viewed in the direction of arrow VIIb in FIG. 7A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of a lower side base in VIIc-VIIc line. 8A is a side view of the intermediate base, FIG. 8B is a top view of the intermediate base as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIIIb in FIG. 8A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of an intermediate base in VIIIc line. 9A is a side view of the upper base, FIG. 9B is a bottom view of the upper base as viewed in the direction of the arrow IXb of FIG. 9A, and FIG. 9C is a view of IXc− in FIG. 9B. It is sectional drawing of an upper side base in IXc line. (A) And (b) is a partial sectional side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. 11A is a side view of the rotating shaft portion, FIG. 11B is a rear view of the rotating shaft portion as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIb in FIG. 11A, and FIG. FIG. (A) is a top view of the rotating shaft portion as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIa in FIG. 11 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating shaft portion along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12 (a). 13A is a side view of the operation element, and FIG. 13B is a top view of the operation element as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line XIVa-XIVa in FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line XIVb-XIVb in FIG. is there. It is sectional drawing of the interlocking displacement part and the pressing member in the state attached to the upper side base. (A) is a side view of the interlocking displacement unit, and (b) is a bottom view of the interlocking displacement unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIb in FIG. (A) is a top view of the interlocking displacement part as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the interlocking displacement part along line XVIIb-XVIIb in FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a side view of the pressing member, and (b) is a top view of the pressing member as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). (A) is a side view of the elevating member, and (b) is a top view of the elevating member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIXb in FIG. FIG. 4 is a developed plan view in which an inner peripheral surface of a cylindrical portion of the rotation shaft is developed into a plane and illustrated. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged development view in which a range XXb in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. (A) to (d) are schematic top views of the handle device. (A) to (d) are schematic perspective views of a rotating shaft portion and an interlocking displacement portion. (A) is a side view of the operation element in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a top view of the operation element in the arrow XXIXb direction of FIG. 29 (a). 29A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line XXXa-XXXa in FIG. 29B, and FIG. 29B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 29B. is there. It is sectional drawing of the handle device in 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. (A)-(c) is a side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. It is a side view of a rotation axis part and an operation element in a 3rd embodiment. It is a side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. (A) And (b) is a partial section side view of an operation element and a rotation axis part in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a side view of the operation element, and (b) is a top view of the operation element as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 38A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operator along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38B, and FIG. 38B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operator along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. is there. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. It is sectional drawing of a handle device. (A) is a top view of the handle device in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the handle device in the arrow XLIIIb direction of FIG. 43 (a). It is a partial section side view of a handle device.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, a handle device 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  The handle device 51 includes a touch sensor for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 891 for stopping firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a touch sensor during the pressing operation. Is a right-handed switch 892 that maximizes the firing intensity of the ball, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of sliding operation (displacement position in the sliding direction) of the handle device 51 (operator 800) by a change in electrical resistance. ) Etc. are arranged.

  When the operation element 800 of the handle device 51 is slid by the player in the right direction (the direction of arrow I, see FIG. 5A), the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor is reduced. The ball changes in accordance with the slide operation amount, and the ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, whereby the ball jumps to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The ball is driven. Further, when the handle device 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor, the firing stop switch 891 and the right strike switch 892 are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the handle device 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), windmills, rails 61 and 62, General winning opening 63, first opening 64, second opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display device unit 80 The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is provided in the through hole, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are arranged in the upper right portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated. On the other hand, when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being changed, during working hours, or in the normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing, or not, by changing the lighting state, and the stop symbol is definitely changed. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or the off symbol, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. Each of the seven-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different from each other, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when there is a ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) of the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability is unchanged, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance port This refers to a game state in which a ball easily enters 640. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable changes and during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and a longer time than in normal times Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes a state that it is easy to ball. Therefore, during probable changes or during working hours, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one time are not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs a variable display of the three symbols, and a third symbol display device 81 triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. There is provided a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs for variably displaying two symbols. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as display symbols (second symbols) for a predetermined time. The variable display for alternately lighting is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  Note that the second entrance 640 can be increased during the probability change or during the working hours by increasing the probability of hitting during the probability changing or the working hours, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. In the case where the ball is easy to enter, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to be able to pass a part of a ball flowing down the left side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. ing. Further, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and allows a part of the balls flowing down the right side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board to pass therethrough. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. If so, a symbol "x" is displayed as a symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp. 84 is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four, but is three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). May be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, a second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are different numbers, for example. The number of award balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 is set to three, and the number of award balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 is set to five. You may.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the change of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 during the probable change and during the working hours can be created as compared with the normal state.

  Here, depending on whether the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640, the probability of a big hit is a low probability state or a high probability state. Are identical. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is that the ball entered the first entry port 64 when the ball entered the second entry port 640. It is set higher than you would. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and is in a state where a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 to increase the chance of a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (a so-called “right-hit”), and aims at a 15R certain-variable big hit by entering the second entrance 640. However, this is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the first entry opening 64 becomes a jackpot, the first symbol is stopped so that the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided below the second ball entrance 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the second entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the first symbol is set so as to become a jackpot stop symbol. The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated, for example, at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 are, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and a forward side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided. The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba corresponding to the jackpot are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are turned on. The opening is performed for a predetermined time, and when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is set. A game state that is opened for a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 650a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result in the second symbol display device 83. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of specific winning ports 65a and 650a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 through the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the slide operation amount of the handle device 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the handle device 51, and the firing stop switch 891 for stopping the firing of the ball and the right-hand switch 892 for maximizing the firing intensity of the ball are turned off. Under the condition that the handle device 51 is not operated, the firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the sliding operation amount (displacement position in the sliding direction) of the handle device 51, and the ball is moved with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the handle device 51. Fired.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5A is a top view of the handle device 51, and FIG. 5B is a side view of the handle device 51 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Vb in FIG. 5A. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device 51 taken along the line VI-VI in FIG.

  5 (a) and 5 (b), the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (that is, the mounting surface of the handle device 51) is schematically shown by a two-dot chain line, and the operating element 800 is moved within a movable range. The state of being slid to the substantially center in FIG. Also, in FIG. 6, only the handle mounting base 600 is cross-sectionally viewed, and the cross-sectional views of other components are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the handle device 51 includes a handle mount 600, a rotation shaft 700 rotatably supported by the handle mount 600, and an operation connected to the rotation shaft 700. The pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) has a main body 810 that is horizontally positioned in front of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). It is arranged in a posture protruding from the camera.

  The handle mounting base 600 includes a lower base 610, an intermediate base 620, and an upper base 630, and is overlapped with the intermediate base 620 interposed between the lower base 610 and the upper base 630. The upper and lower ends (upper and lower sides in FIG. 5B) are closed, and are formed in a cylindrical shape having openings formed in side surfaces (right side surface in FIG. 5B). Note that a storage section 640 is provided on the lower surface of the handle mounting base 600 (the lower base 610). The storage section 640 stores a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotation shaft section 700 based on a change in electrical resistance.

  The rotating shaft portion 700 is rotatably disposed inside the handle mount 600 in a vertical posture in which the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion 700 is along a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 6). A connecting piece 780 protrudes from the lower end surface of the rotating shaft 700, and the connecting piece 780 is connected to a variable resistor housed in the housing 640. Therefore, when the rotating shaft 700 is rotated, the resistance of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotating shaft 700, and the strength corresponding to the resistance of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at (firing intensity).

  The operation element 800 is slidably attached to the handle mounting base 600 via the rotation shaft 700. That is, the operating element 800 is rotated about the axis of the rotating shaft 700 (displaced in a virtual plane perpendicular to the axis of the rotating shaft 700), as shown in FIG. 5A. In addition, it is possible to slide in the directions of arrows I and D within the range from the initial position Pmin to the maximum movable position Pmax.

  When the operation element 800 is slid by the player in the direction of the arrow I or the direction of the arrow D (sliding operation), the rotating shaft 700 is rotated around the axis, and the variable resistor is rotated according to the amount of rotation (rotational position). Of the game ball is increased or decreased by changing the resistance value of the game ball. Further, when the slide operation by the player is released, the operation element 800 is slid in the direction of arrow D by the urging force of the slide direction urging spring 681, and returns to the initial position Pmin. In the present embodiment, the sliding movement of the operation element 800 (the main body 810) is performed along a horizontal plane (a plane perpendicular to the direction of gravity).

  The operation element 800 can be displaced in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 6) with respect to the handle mounting base 600 about a portion (the connection shaft 990) supported by the rotary shaft 700. That is, the operating element 800 is formed so as to be able to push down the held part 830 downward (in the direction of the arrow G in FIG. 5B) with the connecting shaft 990 as the center of rotation (see FIG. 22). In the present embodiment, the operation of pressing down the operation element 800 (the held part 830) is performed downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the operation of pressing down the operation element 800 (the held part 830) causes the weight of the player's hand to act on the held part 830 of the operation element 800, or returns the wrist holding the held part 830 downward. It can be easily performed only with this.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the operation of pushing down the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 (the operation of pushing down the holding portion 830 downward (in the direction of arrow G), and then returning to the position before the pushing down; the same applies hereinafter). By doing so (see FIGS. 25 and 26), it is possible to switch whether or not to interlock the interlocking displacement unit 900 with the sliding operation of the operating element 800. A structure for switching the interlocking state of the interlocking displacement unit 900 in response to the operation of pushing down the operation element 800 will be described later.

  A mark 894 is displayed on the upper surface of the operation element 800 as shown in FIG. With the mark 894, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the relative position between the operation element 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900. In particular, in this embodiment, since the operation element 800 (main body part 810) and the interlocking displacement part 900 are separated from each other in the height direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 5B), the mark 894 is used for the two. It is effective that the relative position can be grasped.

  The interlocking displacement unit 900 is a member for storing a displacement position (slide operation position) of the operation element 800 in the sliding direction, and has a tip outward from the outer peripheral surface of the handle mount 600 (that is, the same as the operation element 800). Direction). In a normal state, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is slid and displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the operation element 800. On the other hand, when the held part 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down (in the direction of arrow G), the operation is performed. The child 800 is cut off, and its displacement position is fixed. That is, the slide operation position of the operation element 800 at the time when the holding section 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down is stored as the fixed position of the interlocking displacement section 900.

  Therefore, the player operates the operating element 800 at a position where the firing intensity of the game ball becomes a desired firing intensity (for example, a position where a firing intensity suitable for causing the game ball to enter the first entrance 64) is obtained. When the slide operation position of the operation member 800 can be adjusted, the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is pushed down to fix the displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion 900, for example, to take a break. After the game is interrupted by returning the slide operation position of the operation device 800 to the initial position Pmin, or after the slide operation position of the operation device 800 is slid to the maximum movable position Pmax in order to make a right-handed operation, The slide operation position of the child 800 is the original operation position (that is, the operation position before the game is interrupted or right-handed, and the operation position suitable for entering the first entrance 64 described above). When adjusting to Slides the operation element 800 with the displacement position to which the interlock displacement section 900 is fixed as a reference (target position) (that is, the mark 894 of the operation element 800 coincides with the arrangement position of the interlock displacement section 900). Thus, the slide operation position of the operation element 800 can be accurately and quickly adjusted to the original operation position (that is, the original displacement position can be accurately and quickly reproduced).

  As described above, the player grips the held portion 830 with his hand and slides the operation element 800 to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity. When the position is fixed, the held portion 830 held by the hand may be pushed down while keeping the state, and the operation of changing the held portion 830 and the hand operating the held portion 830 may be performed. Does not need to perform operations such as operating another operation means with the opposite hand. Therefore, an operation for fixing the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be easily performed.

  Note that when the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G), the flip-up biasing spring 880 is elastically expanded and deformed, and when the pushing force of the player is reduced, the flip-up direction is increased. Due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 880, the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is displaced upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G), and the initial position shown in FIG. ).

  The operator 800 is provided with a firing stop switch 891 and a right-hand switch 892. By pressing the firing stop switch 891 irrespective of the slide operation position (operation amount) of the operation element 800, the player can stop the firing of the game ball and press the right strike switch 892. Thus, the game ball can be fired with the maximum firing intensity.

  Next, the handle mount 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7A is a side view of the lower base 610, and FIG. 7B is a top view of the lower base 610 when viewed in the direction of arrow VIIb in FIG. 7A, and FIG. FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view of the lower base 610 taken along the line VIIc-VIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the lower base 610 includes a body 611 formed in a cylindrical shape, a bottom wall 612 for closing a lower opening of the body 611, and an outer side from the outer peripheral surface of the body 611. 613, a fastening seat 614, a bearing 615 standing upward from the bottom wall 612, and a support shaft 616 standing upward on the side of the bearing 615. Are formed.

  An opening 611a is formed in the body portion 611 by cutting out a part thereof. The opening 611a is a cutout portion for securing a displacement space in the sliding direction (the directions of arrows I and D) and the pressing direction (the direction of the arrow G) of the operation element 800 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and FIG. In the top view shown in (b), it is formed over a range of a central angle of about 170 degrees. Note that the lower base 610 is formed such that the opening 611a is continuous with the opening above the body 611 (the upper side in FIG. 7C) (that is, the opening 611a on the side surface of the body 611 and the upper side of the body 611). The opening is communicated with the opening), so that the opening area as a whole can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability when assembling the rotary shaft 700 and the operating element 800, or the rotary shaft connecting gear 671 and the sliding direction urging spring 681 in the lower base 610. .

  The fastening flange 613 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body 611 at an upper end (upper side in FIG. 7A) of the body 611, and a pair of the flanges 613 is arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. The pair of fastening flanges 613 are provided with insertion holes 613a, respectively. Similar fastening flanges 623, 633 are also provided on the intermediate base 620 and the upper base 630, and the fastening flanges 613, 623, 633 are overlapped with each other and inserted into the insertion holes 613a, 623a, 633a. The bases 610, 620, and 630 are connected and fixed by being fastened and fixed by the fastening bolts B, and the handle mounting base 600 is formed (see FIG. 5).

  The fastening seat portion 614 is a portion that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 611 at the lower end (lower side in FIG. 7A) of the body portion 611, and has a phase of 180 degrees with respect to the opening 611a. It is arranged at different positions. The outer surface (the left surface in FIGS. 7A and 7B) of the fastening seat 614 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the axis of the body 611 (hereinafter, referred to as “seat surface 614 a”). The seat surface 614a serves as a mounting surface (seat surface) when the handle device 51 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (see FIG. 5).

  At the center of the bottom wall 612, a circular insertion hole 612a is formed in a front view. The connecting piece 780 of the rotating shaft 700 is connected to the variable resistor in the housing 640 via the insertion hole 612a (see FIG. 6). The bearing 615 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the insertion hole 612 a of the bottom wall 612, and the lower end side of the rotating shaft 700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing 615 (see FIG. 6).

  The support shaft portion 616 is a portion for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft portion connection gear 671 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 6), and is formed in a shaft shape with a circular cross section. Specifically, the support shaft portion 616 includes a small-diameter portion located on the distal end side and a large-diameter portion formed to have a larger diameter than the small-diameter portion, and the rotation-shaft connecting gear 671 can rotate on the small-diameter portion. It is supported by. The rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671 includes a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 616, and a retaining ring (not shown) such as an E-ring that is fitted to the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 616. , The movement in the axial direction is regulated (held so as not to be able to be removed).

  A sliding-direction urging spring 681 formed as a torsion spring is held on the support shaft 616 on the lower surface side of the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671 (see FIG. 6). Is applied to the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671. The rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671 returns the operating element 800 to the initial position Pmin via the rotating shaft portion 700 (the connecting gear portion 770) by the urging force applied from the sliding direction urging spring 681.

  8A is a side view of the intermediate base 620, FIG. 8B is a top view of the intermediate base 620 when viewed in the direction of the arrow VIIIb in FIG. 8A, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate base 620 taken along the line VIIIc-VIIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the intermediate base 620 includes a disk portion 621 formed in a disk shape, an outer wall portion 622 disposed along an outer edge on a lower surface of the disk portion 621, and a disk portion 621. And a through-hole 624 formed at the center of the disk portion 621.

  The outer diameter of the disk portion 621 is the same as the outer diameter of the body portion 611 of the lower base 610 and the body portion 631 of the upper base 630. In the assembled state of the handle mount 600, the disk portion 621 of the intermediate base 620 is provided. Are sandwiched between the axial end surfaces of the trunk 611 of the lower base 610 and the trunk 631 of the upper base 630 (see FIGS. 5 and 6).

  The outer wall portion 622 is a portion for shielding the internal space of the lower base 610 from the outside (see FIGS. 5B and 6), and a cylindrical body concentric with the disk portion 621 has a central angle of approximately 170 degrees. And is fitted into the opening 611a in the body 611 of the lower base 610. Thus, the rigidity of the entire handle mount 600 can be increased.

  Also, by forming a portion corresponding to the outer wall portion 622 on the intermediate base 620 instead of the lower base 610, the rigidity of the handle mounting base 600 as a whole is ensured while the lower portion is formed as described above. Since the opening area of the side base 610 as a whole can be ensured, the rotary shaft 700 and the operating element 800, or the rotary shaft connecting gear 671 and the sliding direction urging spring 681 are provided in the lower base 610 accordingly. Workability in mounting and assembling can be improved.

  The fastening flange 623 is a plate-like body that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the disk portion 621 and is set to have the same thickness as the disk portion 621, and a pair is disposed with a phase difference of 180 degrees. Each of the pair of fastening flanges 623 has an insertion hole 623a. As described above, the fastening flange 623 overlaps the fastening flanges 613 and 633 of the lower base 610 and the upper base 630 and is fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 5).

  The insertion hole 624 rotatably supports the rotating shaft 700 by its inner peripheral surface (see FIG. 6). A cylindrical bearing 621a is disposed on the lower surface of the disk portion 621 at a position concentric with the insertion hole 624, and the rotating shaft 700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing 621a. Is done. Since the bearing area can be secured by the amount of the bearing portion 621a, it is possible to improve the bearing accuracy and durability of the rotating shaft portion 700.

  9A is a side view of the upper base 630, FIG. 9B is a bottom view of the upper base 630 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IXb of FIG. 9A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the upper side base 630 in the IXc-IXc line of FIG.9 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the upper base 630 includes a body 631 formed in a cylindrical shape, an upper wall 632 for closing the upper opening of the body 631, and an outer wall extending from the outer peripheral surface of the body 631. The fastening flange 633 and the fastening seat portion 634 to be protruded, the sliding holding portion 635 erected downward from the upper surface wall 632, and the support shaft erected downward on the side of the sliding holding portion 635. A portion 636 is formed.

  An opening 631a is formed in the body 631 by cutting out a part thereof. The opening 631a is a cutout portion for securing a displacement space in the sliding direction and the vertical direction of the interlocking displacement portion 900 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and has a central angle in a bottom view shown in FIG. 9B. It is formed over a range of approximately 170 degrees. Note that the upper base 630 has an opening 631a formed as a continuous (continuous) opening with the lower side (lower side in FIG. 9C) opening of the body 631, so that the entire opening area can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability when assembling the interlocking displacement portion 900 and the pressing member 950, or the interlocking displacement portion connecting gear 672 and the interlocking displacement portion biasing spring 682 in the upper base 630. .

  The fastening flange 633 is a plate-like body that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body 631 at the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9A) of the body 631, and has a phase difference of 180 degrees. Are provided, and an insertion hole 633 a is formed in each of the pair of fastening flanges 633. As described above, the fastening flange 633 overlaps the fastening flange 623 of the intermediate base 620 with the fastening flange 613 of the lower base 610, and is fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 5).

  The fastening seat portion 634 is a portion that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 631 at the upper end (upper side in FIG. 9A) of the trunk portion 631, and makes the phase differ by 180 degrees from the opening 631 a. It is arranged in the position where it was. The outer side surface (the left side surface in FIGS. 9A and 9B) of the fastening seat portion 634 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the axis of the body portion 631 (hereinafter, referred to as “seat surface 634a”). The seat surface 634a serves as a mounting surface (seat surface) when the handle device 51 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (see FIG. 5).

  The sliding holding portion 635 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the trunk portion 631, and holds the interlocking displacement portion 900 (see FIG. 6) slidably in the axial direction and rotatable in the circumferential direction by the outer peripheral surface. On the other hand, the sliding holding portion 635 holds the pressing member 950 (see FIG. 15) by its inner peripheral surface so as to be slidable in the axial direction, but not to rotate in the circumferential direction. Specifically, a key groove 635a having a rectangular cross section is formed in the inner peripheral surface of the sliding holding portion 635 along the axial direction, and the key groove 635a has a projection 953 of the pressing member 950 (FIG. 15). ), The rotation of the pressing member 950 in the circumferential direction is restricted. As described later, since the rotation of the pressing member 950 in the circumferential direction can be regulated, the fixing operation of the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be performed without applying the rotational force from the pressing member 950 to the interlocking displacement unit 900. As a result, the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be accurately fixed to a desired fixing position.

  The support shaft portion 636 is a portion for rotatably supporting the interlocking displacement portion connection gear 672 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 6), and is formed in a shaft shape with a circular cross section. Specifically, the support shaft portion 636 includes a small-diameter portion located on the distal end side and a large-diameter portion formed to have a larger diameter than the small-diameter portion, and the interlocking-displacement-portion connection gear 672 can rotate on the small-diameter portion. It is supported by. The interlocking displacement portion connecting gear 672 includes a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 636, and a retaining ring (not shown) such as an E-ring fitted into the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 636. , The movement in the axial direction is regulated (held so as not to be able to be removed).

  An interlocking displacement portion biasing spring 682 formed as a torsion spring is held by the support shaft portion 636 on the upper surface side of the interlocking displacement portion connection gear 672 (see FIG. 6). The biasing force from 682 is applied to the interlocking displacement unit connecting gear 672. The interlocking displacement unit connection gear 672 returns the interlocking displacement unit 900 to the initial position via the connection gear unit 920 of the interlocking displacement unit 900 by the urging force applied from the interlocking displacement unit urging spring 682.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14, the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 800 will be described. 10A and 10B are partial cross-sectional side views of the rotating shaft 700 and the operation device 800. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the operation device 800 is in the initial position. b) corresponds to a state where the operation element 800 is pressed down.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the operating element 800 and the rotating shaft 700 are connected via a connecting shaft 990. Thus, the operating element 800 can be displaced (operated) in two directions. That is, first, the operation element 800 is rotated around the connection shaft 990 as a rotation center, and the held portion 830 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B) (a push-down operation is performed). It is made possible. Second, the operator 800 is rotated integrally with the rotating shaft 700 about the axis of the rotating shaft 700, and the held portion 830 is slid in the sliding direction (the direction of arrow I and arrow D, FIG. 5 (a)) (slide operation).

  FIG. 11A is a side view of the rotating shaft 700, and FIG. 11B is a rear view of the rotating shaft 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIb in FIG. 11A, and FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the push-up member 410. FIG. FIG. 12A is a top view of the rotating shaft 700 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XIIa in FIG. 11A, and FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating the rotating shaft 700 along the line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. FIG. Note that FIGS. 11B and 11C show a state in which the push-up member 410 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the rotating shaft 700 has a rod-shaped shaft main body 710, an insertion hole 720 formed in the shaft main body 710, and an opening formed on the back side of the shaft main body 720. Opening 730, a hook part 740, an operator control part 750, a guide shaft 760, and a connection gear part 770 provided on the outer peripheral surface of the shaft main body 710, and a connection protruding from a lower end surface of the shaft main body 710. A piece 780 and an elastic piece 790 protruding toward the upper end of the shaft body 710 are provided.

  The shaft body 710 is formed as a solid rod having a circular cross section and coaxially connected to a cylindrical portion 711 formed in a cylindrical shape and a lower end (the lower side in FIG. 12B) of the cylindrical portion 711. And a real part 712, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  On the upper end surface (upper side surface in FIG. 12B) of the cylindrical portion 711, a reference surface 711a and a height position in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12B) of the shaft main body portion 710 are higher than the reference surface 711a. A raised surface 711b which is raised upward is formed, whereby a pair of step surfaces 711c connecting the reference surface 711a and the raised surface 711b are formed on the upper end side of the cylindrical member 711. As will be described later, the rotating shaft 700 can rotate the interlocking displacement unit 900 in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating shaft 700 by engaging the step surface 711c with the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900. (See FIGS. 6 and 24).

  As described above, the rotating shaft portion 700 and the interlocking displacement portion 900 are interlockingly displaced by the step surfaces 711c and 911c being engaged with each other. In comparison with the above, it is possible to suppress the displacement between the two due to slippage.

  The reference surface 711a and the raising surface 711b are flat surfaces perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft main body 710, and the pair of step surfaces 711c are parallel to each other and parallel to the axial direction of the shaft main body 710. Flat surface. Further, the pair of step surfaces 711c are arranged so that the phases are different by 180 degrees. That is, the virtual plane formed by the pair of step surfaces 711 c is a plane including the axis of the shaft main body 710.

  A guide groove 715 is formed in the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 711. The guide groove 715 is a groove for holding the elevating member 420 (see FIG. 19) at two positions of a first position (an interlocking position) or a second position (a separating position). The detailed configuration of the guide groove 715 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The insertion hole 720 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the connection shaft 990 is inserted, and a pair of holes is formed in the cylindrical portion 711 of the shaft main body 710. The connecting shaft 990 is made of brass and formed into a shaft having a circular cross section. The opening 730 is an opening for securing an arrangement space for the push-up member 410, and is formed as a rectangular opening in a rear view in the cylindrical portion 711 of the shaft main body 710, as shown in FIG. Protrusions 731 for rotatably supporting the push-up member 410 are provided on a pair of inner side surfaces facing the opening 730, respectively.

  Here, the push-up member 410 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. 11C, and as shown in FIG. 12B, a plate-like body having an L-shaped cross section with a lower end bent. The concave portions 411 are respectively formed on the upper end sides of the pair of outer surfaces facing each other. When the protrusion 731 of the opening 730 is fitted in the recess 411, the push-up member 410 is rotatably supported in the opening 730 about the protrusion 731 and the recess 411 as a rotation axis (see FIG. 10). The push-up member 410 is disposed in such a manner that the bent portion on the lower end side faces the axis of the cylindrical portion 711 of the shaft main body 710.

  The hook member 740 is a portion for engaging and holding one end of a spring-up biasing spring 880 formed as a coil spring (see FIG. 10), and has a portion having an L-shaped cross section that is bent upward. A pair is provided at a predetermined interval. The manipulator restricting portion 750 is a rod-shaped portion for restricting the displacement of the manipulator 800 about the connection shaft 990 as a rotation center, and is disposed on the back side of the shaft main body 710 and below the opening 730. .

  That is, the flip-up direction biasing spring 880 is disposed in a state of being elastically extended, and the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is lowered by the player (the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B). After being pushed down (see FIG. 10B), when the pushing-down operation is released, the operating element 800 causes the held portion 830 side to move by the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 880 in the flip-up direction. It is flipped upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G, see FIG. 5B). In this case, the displacement of the operation element 800 is restricted by the operation element restricting portion 750 receiving the lower surface of the main body 810 of the operation element 800. Thus, the operating element 800 is held at the initial position in the pressing operation (see FIG. 10A).

  As described above, since the operating element restricting portion 750 is a portion that receives the operating element 800 (the lower surface of the main body section 810) that has been jumped up by the urging force of the jumping direction urging spring 880, a large load is applied. However, in the present embodiment, such a manipulator restricting portion 750 is provided not on the thin cylindrical portion 711 but on the solid portion 712. Thereby, the rigidity can be secured and the jumped-up operator 800 (the lower surface of the main body 810) can be firmly received. As a result, the durability can be improved.

  The guide shaft 760 is a part for guiding the displacement direction of the operation element 800 and smoothing the displacement when pushing down the held part 830, and sandwiches the solid part 712 with respect to the operation element regulation part 750. And is disposed on the front side of the solid portion 712 on the opposite side. When the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down, the guide shaft 760 moves in the guide groove 870 of the operation element 800 (see FIG. 10B) to guide the displacement of the operation element 800. It can be guided along the groove 870. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the operation when the held part 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down.

  The connection gear portion 770 is a portion formed as a spur gear, and is meshed with the rotation shaft portion connection gear 671 (see FIG. 6). As described above, the urging force from the slide direction urging spring 681 is transmitted from the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 671 to the connecting gear portion 770, whereby the rotating shaft portion 700 is rotated, and the operating element 800 is moved to the initial position Pmin. (See FIG. 5A).

  The connecting piece 780 is a shaft body fixed to the lower end surface of the shaft main body 710. As described above, the connection piece 780 is connected to the variable resistor (not shown) through the insertion hole 612a of the lower base 610.

  The elastic piece 790 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section, is disposed on the outer peripheral surface near the step surface 711c on the upper end side of the shaft main body 710 (cylindrical portion 711), and is higher than the raised surface 711b. It is projected to. The elastic piece 790 is a part for changing the operation feeling when the operation element 800 slides. That is, as will be described later, when the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed at a predetermined position and the operation unit 800 is slid using the interlocking displacement unit 900 as a target position, the sliding operation is performed at the target position (interlocking displacement unit 900). , The elastic piece 790 changes over the first protrusion 913 (that is, is elastically deformed), thereby changing the operational feeling of the slide operation (see FIG. 28). Accordingly, the player can recognize that the operation position of the slide operation has approached the target position without continuously tracking the positional relationship between the operation element 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 visually. Performance can be improved.

  FIG. 13A is a side view of the operation element 800, and FIG. 13B is a top view of the operation element 800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIIIb in FIG. FIG. 14A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator 800 taken along line XIVa-XIVa in FIG. 13B, and FIG. 14B is a manipulator 800 taken along line XIVb-XIVb in FIG. 13B. It is the elements on larger scale sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the operating element 800 includes a main body 810 including a base 811 and a leg 812, an insertion hole 820 formed in the leg 812 of the main body 810, and a main body 810. A held portion 830 erected from the base portion 811, a hook portion 840 and a support wall 850 provided on the outer surface of the base portion 811 of the main body portion 810, and a cam member 860 erected on the leg portion 812 of the main body portion 810 And a guide groove 870 provided on the inner surface of the leg 812 of the main body 810.

  The main body 810 includes a long box-shaped base 811 and a pair of legs 812 extending along the longitudinal direction from the base side of the base 811 (the left side in FIG. 13). A held portion 830 is set up substantially vertically on the tip side (the right side in FIG. 13) of the base portion 811. The pair of legs 812 are arranged substantially parallel to each other with a predetermined space therebetween, and the rotating shaft 700 is disposed between the pair of legs 812.

  Further, insertion holes 820 are formed in the pair of leg portions 812 along the facing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 13B). The rotation shaft 700 is disposed between the pair of legs 812 and the connecting shaft 990 inserted from one of the insertion holes 820 of the pair of legs 812 passes through the insertion hole 720 of the rotation shaft 700. At the same time, the operation element 800 is connected to the rotary shaft 700 via the connection shaft 990 by being inserted into the other insertion hole 820 of the pair of leg portions 812, and below the held portion 830 (arrow G). Direction (see FIG. 5B)) (see FIG. 10).

  The extended distal ends (the left side in FIG. 13A) of the pair of leg portions 812 are formed to be curved in an arc shape in a side view shown in FIG. 13A, and the outer peripheral surface of a portion curved in the arc shape , Elastic membrane members 893 are respectively adhered. The elastic film member 893 is a member formed in a film shape from an elastic material such as a rubber material. When the held portion 830 of the operation element 800 is pressed down, the connection shaft 990 becomes the center of rotation, and the leg portion 812 pushed up causes the elastic film member 893 to move the disk portion 621 on the intermediate base 620. (See FIG. 25). Thus, the displacement of the operation element 800 in the sliding operation direction can be restricted by using the adhesion force (frictional force) of the elastic film member 893. That is, it is possible to prevent the operation element 800 from being displaced in the sliding direction in a state where the held portion 830 is pressed down.

  The held portion 830 is a portion that is gripped by the fingers or palms of the player when the operator 800 performs a sliding operation or a pressing operation, and is formed as a rod-like body having a substantially rectangular cross section with a corner chamfered in an arc shape. Is done. As described above, since the held portion 830 is formed as a rod-shaped body, the held portion 830 can be easily held (gripped), and as a result, when the operation element 800 is slid and pushed down. Operability can be improved.

  Further, since the held portion 830 is provided upright along the vertical direction from the main body 810, the held portion 830 can be held (held) by a player in a natural posture. In particular, since the held portion 830 is erected upward from the main body 810, the outer edge of the palm may be placed on the upper surface of the main body 810 when gripping the held portion 830. it can. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player, and when pushing down the operation element 800, the weight of the hand can also be applied to the upper surface of the main body 810, so that the pushing down operation is easy. Can be done.

  The above-described firing stop switch 891 and right-handed switch 892 are provided on the standing end of the held portion 830 and on the back side of the held portion 830 (the side facing the connecting shaft 990 (see FIG. 10)). This allows the player to easily operate the firing stop switch 891 with the thumb or forefinger and the right-hand switch 892 with the forefinger or middle finger with the held portion 830 naturally grasped.

  The hook member 840 is a part for engaging and holding the other end of the flip-up direction urging spring 880 whose one end is engaged and held by the hook part 740 (see FIG. 11) of the rotary shaft 700 (see FIG. 10). ), And is formed in an L-shaped cross section bent downward.

  The support wall 850 is a wall portion for supporting the spring 880 in a flip-up direction from below, and is formed to be curved in a convex arc shape upward in a side view shown in FIG. In this manner, by bending the support wall 850 in an arc shape, the space for disposing the spring 880 in the flip-up direction (the distance between the hooks 740 and 840) can be made longer (see FIG. )), A spring 880 having a longer overall length can be used in a limited space. As a result, the urging force can be secured, and the durability of the spring 880 can be secured.

  The cam member 860 is a member for pushing up the push-up member 410 displaceably disposed on the rotating shaft 700, and includes a rod-shaped erection portion 861 erected between the pair of legs 812. The extending portion 861 extends from the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 13B) to the base 811 side (that is, the side where the rotating shaft 700 is disposed, and the right side in FIG. 13B). A push-up cam 862 is provided, and these are integrally formed. The cam member 860 is formed separately from the main body 810, and both ends of the bridging portion 861 are fastened and fixed to the legs 812 of the main body 810 by fastening bolts (not shown).

  The push-up cam 862 is formed in a triangular shape in a sectional view, and is arranged with a triangular top portion facing upward as shown in FIG. In a state where the rotating shaft 700 is connected to the main body 810 (between the pair of legs 812) via the connecting shaft 990, the push-up cam 862 has a triangular apex having a rotating shaft (projection) of the push-up member 410. 731 and the concave portion 411, which are disposed vertically downward in FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (c), and a triangular slope (the right side in FIG. 14 (a)) is a push-up member. It is arranged at a position that supports the lower end of 410 (see FIG. 10A).

  When the operating element 800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B), the cam member 860 is provided with a slope on one side (right side in FIG. 14A) of the triangular shape of the push-up cam 862. Using the top portion (upper side in FIG. 14A), the push-up member 410 disposed on the rotary shaft 700 is pushed up (see FIGS. 10A and 10B).

  As described above, the push-up cam 862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross-section, and a structure in which the push-up member 410 is pushed up by using the slope and the top portion thereof allows a normal state in which the operating element 800 is not pushed down. (See FIG. 10 (a)), the push-up member 410 can be arranged further downward, and the operating element 800 is pushed down while reducing the size in the overall height direction (axial direction, vertical direction in FIG. 10 (a)). When the operation is performed (see FIG. 10B), the amount of upward pushing of the push-up member 410 can be secured, so that the stroke amount required for the operation of pushing down the operating element 800 is reduced, and the operability is improved. In addition to this, it is possible to surely switch the interlocking / non-interlocking of the interlocking displacement unit 900 by increasing the elevating stroke of the elevating member 420 (see FIG. 19) (see FIGS. See 5).

  The guide groove 870 is a concave groove for guiding the guide shaft 760 (see FIG. 11) of the rotating shaft 700, and is formed as a groove having a rectangular cross section on the opposing surfaces of the pair of legs 812. And is curved and extended in an arc shape with the center as the center. Therefore, when the operation element 800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B) (see FIGS. 10A and 10B), the guide shaft 760 of the rotary shaft 700 is operated. By moving along the guide groove 870 and being guided, it is possible to smoothly perform the operation of pushing down the operation element 800, which is the displacement around the connection shaft 990.

  Note that the main body 810 and the held portion 830 have a two-part structure in which the center in the width direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 13B) is a dividing surface (matching surface). That is, the main body part 810 and the held part 830 are formed to be plane-symmetric with respect to the first component forming one side of the main body part 810 and the held part 830, and the divided surface is symmetrical with respect to the first component. 810 and a second component forming one side of the held portion 830. By joining the first component and the second component with each other at their divided surfaces, a fire stop switch 891 and the like are provided inside thereof. It is formed in a hollow shape having a space for wiring an electrical connection line.

  Next, the interlocking displacement part 900 and the pressing member 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the interlocking displacement unit 900 and the pressing member 950 in a state where it is attached to the upper base 630.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the upper surface wall 632 of the upper base 630 is provided with a sliding holding portion 635 on the lower surface side thereof. Each member 950 is provided. As described above, the interlocking displacement portion 900 is slidable in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 15) and rotatable in the circumferential direction by inserting the slide holding portion 635 into the insertion hole 925. The pressing member 950 is slidable in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 15) by fitting the protrusion 953 into the key groove 635a of the sliding holding portion 635, but cannot rotate in the circumferential direction. It is said.

  A pressing direction urging spring 970 formed as a coil spring is disposed on the lower surface side of the upper surface wall 632 of the upper base 630, and the pressing direction urging spring 970 is provided between the upper surface wall 632 and the interlocking displacement unit 900. And is arranged in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed. Therefore, the urging force (elastic recovery force) from the pressing direction urging spring 970 is applied to the pressing member 950 via the interlocking displacement unit 900, whereby the lifting member 420 is moved to the first position (interlocking position). ) Or the second position (separation position) (see FIGS. 24 and 26), the pressing member 950 always keeps being pressed down (downward in FIG. 15). .

  The interlocking displacement unit 900 is pressed against the pressing member 950 by the urging force applied from the pressing direction urging spring 970, while the elevating member 420 is held at the first position (interlocking position) or the second position (cutoff position). Therefore, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is in a state of being sandwiched (pressed and held) between the pressing-direction urging spring 970 and the elevating member 420. Therefore, when the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the rotation shaft unit 700, it is held at the separated position.

  FIG. 16A is a side view of the interlocking displacement unit 900, and FIG. 16B is a bottom view of the interlocking displacement unit 900 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A. FIG. 17A is a top view of the interlocking displacement unit 900 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16A, and FIG. 17B is an interlocking displacement along line XVIIb-XVIIb in FIG. FIG. 9 is a sectional view of a part 900.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the interlocking displacement unit 900 includes an interlocking main body 910 formed in a cylindrical shape, and a connecting gear 920 disposed coaxially on the upper end side of the interlocking main body 910. An urging spring holding portion 930 protruding from an upper surface side of the coupling gear portion 920; a pointing piece 940 extending radially outward from an outer peripheral surface on a lower end side of the interlocking main body portion 910; The first projection 913 and the second projection 914 are formed to project from the outer peripheral surface on the lower end side of the portion 910.

  On the lower end surface (lower side surface of FIGS. 16A and 17B) of the interlocking main body 910, a reference surface 911a and the axial direction of the interlocking main body 910 (see FIGS. A raised surface 911b whose height position in FIG. 17 (b) is raised downward is formed, whereby a reference surface 911a and a raised surface 911b are formed on the lower end side of the interlocking main body 911. A pair of step surfaces 911c to be connected are formed.

  As described above, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is configured such that the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is engaged with the step surface 711c of the rotation shaft unit 700, so that the rotation shaft 700 The rotation can be transmitted to the interlocking displacement unit 900, and the interlocking displacement unit 900 is rotated (displaced) in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating shaft 700 (sliding operation of the operation element 800) (see FIGS. 6 and 24). Since the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is disengaged from the step surface 711c of the rotary shaft unit 700, the rotation of the rotary shaft unit 700 accompanying the sliding operation of the operation element 800 is transmitted to the interlocking displacement unit 900. However, when the operation element 800 is slid, only the rotating shaft 700 is rotated, and the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed at a predetermined position (see FIGS. 23 and 26).

  The reference surface 911a and the raising surface 911b are flat surfaces perpendicular to the axial direction of the interlocking main body 910, and the pair of step surfaces 911c are parallel to each other and parallel to the axial direction of the interlocking main body 910. Flat surface. In addition, the pair of step surfaces 911c are arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. That is, a virtual plane formed by the pair of step surfaces 911 c is a plane including the axis of the shaft main body 910.

  The first protrusion 913 and the second protrusion 914 are portions for giving a change to the operational feeling when sliding the operation element 800, and are formed as hemispherical protrusions protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the interlocking main body 910. . That is, the first protrusion 913 and the second protrusion 914 are disposed on the movement locus of the elastic piece 790 when the rotation shaft 700 is rotated in accordance with the sliding operation of the operating element 800. By passing (passing over) the first protrusion 913 and the second protrusion 914, an operation resistance is generated, and the feeling of operation is changed.

  The connection gear portion 920 is a portion formed as a spur gear, and is meshed with the interlocking displacement portion connection gear 672 (see FIG. 6). As described above, the urging force from the interlocking displacement unit urging spring 682 is transmitted from the interlocking displacement unit connection gear 672 to the connection gear unit 920, thereby rotating the interlocking displacement unit 900 and returning to the initial position Pmin. (See FIG. 5A).

  The biasing spring holding portion 930 is a portion for holding the pushing direction biasing spring 970 by being fitted inside the inner circumference of the pushing direction biasing spring 970. It is formed with a corresponding outer diameter.

  Insertion holes 925 are formed in the urging spring holding portion 930 and the connection gear portion 920 along their axes. The insertion hole 925 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the slide holding portion 635 of the upper base 630 is inserted (see FIG. 15). The inner diameter of the insertion hole 925 is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the slide holder 635, so that the interlocking displacement unit 900 can slide in the axial direction and rotate in the circumferential direction relative to the slide holder 635. It is possible.

  The indicating piece 940 is a flat plate-shaped portion for indicating the displacement position (target position) of the operating element 800, and is an outer peripheral surface of the interlocking main body 910, on the side of the raising surface 911b (the axis center with respect to the reference surface 911a). It is disposed on the outer peripheral surface that is on the opposite side between them. That is, when the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is engaged with the step surface 711c of the rotary shaft 700 (see FIGS. 6 and 24), the phase between the pointing piece 940 and the operating element 800 (slide displacement direction) (Displacement positions at the same time) (both overlap in top view; see FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b)).

  FIG. 18A is a side view of the pressing member 950, and FIG. 18B is a top view of the pressing member 950 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18A.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the pressing member 950 includes a disk portion 951 formed in a disk shape, a shaft portion 952 erected from the upper surface of the disk portion 951, and an outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 952. The projections 953 are formed so as to protrude.

  The disk portion 951 is a portion for pushing down the upper surface of the elevating member 420 with its lower surface, and is formed to have an outer diameter that can be arranged on the inner peripheral side of the interlocking main body portion 910 of the interlocking displacement portion 900 (see FIG. . The shaft portion 952 is a shaft having a circular cross section inserted through the inner periphery of the sliding holding portion 635 of the upper base 630, and the protrusion 953 is formed in a key groove 635 a formed on the inner periphery of the sliding holding portion 635. The projections to be engaged. Therefore, the pressing member 950 can slide in the axial direction with respect to the sliding holding portion 635, but is held in a state in which rotation in the circumferential direction is restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 10 to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. A guide groove 715 is formed in the shaft main body 710 of the rotary shaft 700 on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 711. As described above, the guide groove 715 is a groove for holding the elevating member 420 (see FIG. 19) at two positions of a first position (an interlocking position) or a second position (a separating position). Here, the elevating member 420 and the guide groove 715 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 19A is a side view of the elevating member 420, and FIG. 19B is a top view of the elevating member 420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIXb in FIG. 19A.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the elevating member 420 is a member disposed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 711 (see FIG. 15) of the rotating shaft 700, and is formed in a columnar shape with a circular cross section. Guide projections 421 project from a plurality of locations (three in this embodiment) on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar body. Each guide projection 421 is a part for moving along the guide groove 715 (see FIG. 21) of the rotating shaft 700, and is formed in the same shape, and as shown in FIG. They are arranged at equal intervals in the direction (in this embodiment, at intervals of 120 degrees).

  The lower end of the elevating member 420 is formed in a conical shape coaxial with the columnar portion. This allows the lifting member 420 to be closer to the push-up member 410 on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 711 of the rotating shaft 700 (see FIG. 24), so that a limited space is provided on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 711. Can be effectively utilized, and the overall size can be reduced.

  FIG. 20 is a developed plan view in which the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 711 of the rotating shaft 700 is developed into a plane. Note that, in FIG. 20, reference numerals for the respective portions of the guide groove 715 are omitted for simplifying the drawing and facilitating understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the guide groove 715 is formed with a periodicity along the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 711 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 20). Specifically, the guide groove 715 has a shape in which a range XXb corresponding to a range of a central angle of 120 degrees is repeated in the circumferential direction (a shape in which three ranges XXb are arranged in the circumferential direction). Therefore, the three guide protrusions 421 of the lifting member 420 are guided by the guide grooves 715 in different ranges XXb.

  Next, referring to FIG. 21, the guide protrusion 421 of the elevating member 420 is guided by the guide groove 715, so that the elevating member 420 is held at the first position (interlocking position) or the second position (separation position). The structure will be described. In this description, FIG. 6 and FIGS. 22 to 26 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged development view in which the range XXb in FIG. 22 to 26 are cross-sectional views of the handle device 51. FIG. In FIGS. 22 and 23, as in FIG. 6, the cross-sectional views of the rotating shaft 700, the operating element 800, and the interlocking displacement unit 900 are omitted, while in FIGS. The child 800 and the interlocking displacement part 900 are viewed in cross section.

  FIGS. 6 and 24 correspond to a state in which the elevating member 420 is disposed at the first position (interlocking position) and the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be displaced in conjunction with the sliding operation of the operation element 800. FIG. 26 corresponds to a state in which the elevating member 420 is disposed at the second position (interlocking position) and the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the sliding operation of the operation element 800 (non-interlocking state). FIGS. 22 and 25 correspond to a state in which the operating element 800 is pressed down and the elevating member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position.

  As shown in FIG. 21, when the guide protrusion 421 is located at the position P1, the elevating member 420 is disposed at the first position (interlocking position). In this state, as shown in FIG. 24, the guide protrusion 421 is pressed against the first wall 715a of the guide groove 715 by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970, and is maintained at the position P1. In this state, as shown in FIG. 6, the step surface 711c of the rotary shaft 700 and the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 are engaged, so that when the operating element 800 is slid, the slide is performed. The interlocking displacement unit 900 is displaced in conjunction with the operation.

  When the operating element 800 is pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B) from a state in which the elevating member 420 is arranged at the first position (interlocking position) (see FIGS. 6 and 24), The lifting member 420 is pushed up by the lifting member 410. As a result, the guide protrusion 421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 715 (path L1), and hits the rising inclined wall portion 715b. When the operating element 800 is further pushed down and the elevating member 420 is pushed upward, the guide protrusion 421 is guided along the rising inclined wall portion 715b (path L2), and abuts on the guide regulating wall portion 715c at the position Pa. .

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 25, the operation of pressing down the operation element 800 cannot be performed. In this case, the leg 812 of the operation element 800 is pushed upward, and the elastic film member 893 is brought into close contact with the lower surface of the disk portion 621 of the intermediate base 620, so that the adhesion (frictional force) of the elastic film member 893 is used. Thus, the sliding movement of the operation element 800 can be restricted. That is, it is possible to suppress the operation element 800 that has been pressed down from being displaced in the sliding direction. As a result, the fixed position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be accurately fixed to the displacement position intended by the player.

  Further, as described above, the operation of pushing down the operation element 800 can be performed by the player without releasing a part of the finger holding the held portion 830 regardless of the slide position of the operation element 800. ,It can be carried out. Thereby, operability can be improved. Further, after performing the pressing operation of the operation element 800, it is easy to maintain the operation state (a state in which the slide operation amount of the operation element 800 is fixed to a desired slide operation amount). Therefore, the firing intensity of the game ball can be accurately fixed to a desired firing intensity.

  In addition, if the structure is such that the operating element 800 is pushed down, the player can be displaced downward only by the action of applying the weight of the hand as described above. That is, the player can maintain the pressing operation only by performing a simple operation of applying the weight of the hand, so that the player can reduce the fatigue of the player and reduce the firing intensity of the ball to the desired firing intensity. Can be fixed.

  Further, since the lower surface of the disk portion 621 of the intermediate base 620 is formed as a smooth surface, the operation amount (slide position) of the slide operation of the operation element 800 can be fixed at an arbitrary slide position. That is, even in a structure in which the saw-toothed members are engaged with each other, the position of the sliding operation can be firmly fixed in the same manner, but it is not possible to finely adjust the pitch of the sawtooth. On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the elastic film member 893 is brought into close contact with the smooth surface as in the present embodiment, it is possible to adjust to an arbitrary slide position and firmly fix the slide position.

  After the guide projection 421 abuts on the guide restricting wall 715c at the position Pa (see FIGS. 22 and 25), when the player looses the operating force, the downward pushing operation of the operating element 800 is released, and the push-up operation is performed. When the member 410 is lowered (see FIG. 26), the lifting member 420 is pressed down by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970. As a result, the guide projection 421 is moved down (path L3), hits the descending inclined wall 715d, is guided along the descending inclined wall 715d, and reaches the position P2 (path L4).

  When the guide protrusion 421 is located at the position P2, the elevating member 420 is arranged at the second position (separation position). In this state, as shown in FIG. 26, the guide protrusion 421 is pressed against the second wall 715e by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970, and is maintained at the position P2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 23, the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the step surface 711c of the rotation shaft unit 700, and the rotation shaft unit 700 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 are disengaged. Therefore, even if the operation element 800 is slid, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is not displaced. That is, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the operation element 800 and is fixed (maintained) at the separated position.

  When the operating element 800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B) from the state where the elevating member 420 is arranged at the second position (separation position) (see FIGS. 23 and 26), The lifting member 420 is pushed up by the lifting member 410. As a result, the guide protrusion 421 is raised (path L5) and hits the rising inclined wall portion 715f. When the operating element 800 is further pushed down and the elevating member 420 is pushed up, the guide protrusion 421 is guided along the rising inclined wall portion 715b (path L6) and abuts on the guide regulating wall portion 715g at the position Pb. .

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 25, the operation of pressing down the operation element 800 cannot be performed. When the player looses the operating force and releases the downward pushing operation of the operating element 800, thereby lowering the push-up member 410 (see FIG. 24), the lifting member 420 is attached to the pressing-direction urging spring 970. It is pushed down by the power. As a result, the guide protrusion 421 is moved down (path L7), hits the downward inclined wall 715h, is guided along the downward inclined wall 715h, and reaches the position P1 (path L8).

  Next, referring to FIGS. 27 and 28, the slide position of the operation element 800 is stored using the interlock displacement section 900, and the slide position of the operation element 800 is adjusted based on the interlock displacement section 900 (the original position). The adjustment method will be described.

  FIGS. 27A to 27D are schematic top views of the handle device 51. FIG. FIGS. 28A to 28D are schematic perspective views of the rotating shaft 700 and the interlocking displacement unit 900.

  27A corresponds to a state in which the operation element 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 are at the initial position Pmin, and FIG. 27B shows that the interlocking displacement unit 900 interlocks with the sliding operation of the operation element 800. FIG. 27C corresponds to a state in which the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed at a predetermined displacement position, and only the operation element 800 returns to the initial position Pmin. Corresponds to a state in which the operation element 800 is being slid toward the fixed position of the interlocking displacement unit 900.

  FIG. 28A corresponds to the state of FIGS. 27A and 27B (that is, the state in which the interlocking displacement unit 900 is displaced in conjunction with the sliding operation of the operation element 800), and FIG. FIG. 28B corresponds to the state of FIG. 27C (that is, the state in which the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed at the predetermined displacement position and only the operator 800 is returned to the initial position Pmin), and FIG. ) Corresponds to the state of FIG. 27D (that is, the state in which the operating element 800 is slid toward the fixed position of the interlocking displacement unit 900), and FIG. This corresponds to a state where the slide operation is performed past the position (the fixed position of the interlocking displacement unit 900).

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the elevating member 420 is at the first position (interlocking position) (see FIGS. 6 and 24), and the turning positions of the operation element 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 are located at the initial position Pmin. When the player performs a sliding operation of the operation element 800 in the direction of arrow I (see FIG. 5A) from the state of the operation, as shown in FIG. It is displaced in conjunction with the 800 slide operation.

  In this case, the rotating shaft 700 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 have their step surfaces 711c and 911c engaged with each other, and are integrally rotated as shown in FIG. . Therefore, the relative position between the elastic piece 790 of the rotating shaft 700 and the first protrusion 913 of the interlocking displacement unit 900 does not change.

  When the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted to a desired firing intensity as a result of adjusting the slide operation amount of the operating device 800 in accordance with the game state, the lower portion of the operating device 800 (in the direction of arrow G, FIG. 5B ), The lifting member 420 is set to the second position (separation position) (see FIGS. 23 and 26). As a result, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the operation unit 800, so that the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be fixed at a predetermined displacement position (position Pθ), and the operation unit 800 is independent of the interlocking displacement unit 900. Only the slide can be operated.

  That is, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 27B, if the operation of pushing down the operation element 800 is performed, the turning position of the operation element 800 is returned to the initial position to take a break, for example. Even if the game is interrupted, as shown in FIG. 27C, the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is maintained at the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position (position Pθ) before the interruption of the gaming machine) ( Fixed). Similarly, for example, even if the displacement position of the operation element 800 is slid to the maximum movable position Pmax in order to make a right strike, the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is held (fixed) at the original displacement position (position Pθ). )it can.

  Therefore, when adjusting the displacement position of the operation element 800 to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position before the game is interrupted or right-handed (the position Pθ)), the interlocking displacement unit 900 is fixed. Using the displacement position as a reference (target position), for example, as shown in FIG. 27D, the operator 800 is slid in the direction of arrow I toward the interlocking displacement unit 900, and the mark 894 of the operator 800 is interlocked. By matching with the displacement unit 900, the displacement position of the operation element 800 can be accurately and quickly adjusted to the original displacement position (position Pθ) (the original displacement position can be accurately and quickly reproduced).

  As described above, in the state where the interlocking displacement unit 900 is held (fixed) at the predetermined displacement position (position Pθ) and the slide position of the operation element 800 is returned to the initial position Pmin (FIG. 27C) 28), the elastic piece 790 of the rotating shaft 700 is circumferentially separated from the first protrusion 913 of the interlocking displacement part 900 as shown in FIG.

  As described above, since the first protrusion 913 is disposed on the movement locus of the elastic piece 790, the operating element 800 is slid in the direction of the arrow I toward the interlocking displacement section 900 (see FIG. 27D). When the sliding position of the operation element 800 approaches the displacement position (position Pθ) of the interlocking displacement section 900, the elastic piece 790 can get over the first protrusion 913 as shown in FIG. it can.

  That is, the operational feeling of the slide operation can be changed using the elastic deformation resistance of the elastic piece 790. As a result, even when the player does not keep track of the positional relationship between the mark 894 of the slide operator 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 visually, the change in the operational feeling causes the slide operator 800 to move to the target position (interlocking displacement unit). 900) can be recognized, and the operability of the slide operation can be improved.

  Here, for example, when the slide operator 800 is slid in the direction of the arrow I past the target position (the interlocking displacement unit 900) due to the carelessness of the player, as shown in FIG. The elastic piece 790 can get over the second protrusion 914. That is, the operational feeling of the slide operation can be changed using the elastic deformation resistance of the elastic piece 790. Therefore, even if the player does not keep track of the positional relationship between the mark 894 of the slide operator 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900 visually, the change in the operational feeling causes the slide operator 800 to move to the target position (interlocking displacement unit 900). ) Can be recognized, and the operability of the slide operation can be improved.

  In particular, in this case, the disposition positions of the first protrusion 913 and the second protrusion 914 are set so as to be different in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 700, so that the elastic piece 790 gets over the first protrusion 913. The form of elastic deformation (elastic deformation resistance) of the elastic piece 790 can be made different from when the vehicle gets over the second protrusion 914. As a result, the operation feeling of the slide operation can be made different, so that the player can change the operation feeling without visually grasping the positional relationship between the slide operator 800 and the interlocking displacement unit 900, for example. It can be distinguished whether the notification indicates that the vehicle has approached the target position or that the vehicle has passed the target position.

  Next, a handle device 2051 according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the pressing operation of the operation element 800 can be arbitrarily performed has been described. However, the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment does not operate the operation element 2800 unless a predetermined operation is performed. It is formed so that the pressing operation cannot be performed. The same portions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 29A is a side view of the operation element 2800 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 29B is a top view of the operation element 2800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIXb in FIG. 30A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator 2800 taken along the line XXXa-XXXa in FIG. 29B, and FIG. 30B is a manipulator 2800 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. It is the elements on larger scale sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the operation element 2800 according to the second embodiment, the insertion holes 2820 formed in the pair of legs 812 of the main body 810 are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body 810 (see FIG. a) A left and right direction) is formed in a long hole shape having a major axis direction. Specifically, it is formed by extending the insertion hole 820 in the first embodiment toward the base 811 side.

  It should be noted that the insertion hole 2820 has a short diameter (a vertical dimension in FIG. 29A) slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 990, and the connection shaft 990 can be displaced along the long diameter direction of the insertion hole 2820. You. Further, the connecting shaft 990 is fixed to the insertion hole 720 of the rotating shaft 700.

  FIG. 31 to FIG. 33 are cross-sectional views of the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment. FIG. 34A to FIG. 34C are side views of the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 2800. 34 (a), 34 (b) and 34 (c) correspond to partially enlarged views of the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 2800 in FIGS. 31, 32 and 33, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 34A, in the normal state, the operating element 2800 is configured such that the urging force of the flip-up direction urging spring 880 causes the held portion 830 to approach the rotating shaft 700 (FIG. 31). The connection shaft 990 is positioned at the end of the insertion hole 2820 on the held portion 830 side (the right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, in such a normal state, the position of the guide shaft 760 of the rotary shaft 700 is shifted with respect to the entrance of the guide groove 870 of the operator 2800 (see FIG. 34A), and the operator 2800 is moved downward (arrow). In the G direction, see FIG. 5B).

  In this case, the operator 2800 is displaced horizontally (in the direction of arrow B) in a direction away from the rotating shaft 700 (rightward in FIG. 32). That is, the player horizontally pulls the held portion 830 toward the player (toward the player). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 34B, the connecting shaft 990 is positioned at the end of the insertion hole 2820 on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 32) from the held portion 830, and the guide groove of the operation element 2800 is provided. The guide shaft 760 of the rotating shaft 700 can be disposed immediately below the entrance of the 870 (see FIG. 34B). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 (c), the operator 2800 can be pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5 (b)).

  As described above, according to the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, when the operation element 2800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (that is, when the operation of pulling the held portion 830 toward the near side is performed), the operation element 2800 It is possible to perform a downward pressing operation. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation element 2800 from being inadvertently pushed down.

  That is, since the operation of pressing down the operation element 2800 is in the direction of lowering the held portion 830 along the vertical direction, it is easy to use the weight of the hand, and therefore, as described above, the operation of pressing down is easy. However, there is a possibility that the pushing operation is performed carelessly and unintentionally. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the operation of pressing down the operation element 2800 requires that the operation element 2800 be displaced in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B). Inadvertent execution at a timing different from that described above can be reliably suppressed.

  Next, a handle device 3051 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which a predetermined operation must be performed in order to enable the operation member 2800 to be pressed down. However, the handle device 3051 according to the third embodiment includes the operation member 3800. The condition for enabling the push-down operation is to execute the predetermined operation a plurality of times. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are side views of the rotating shaft 700 and the operator 3800 in the third embodiment. Note that the same state is illustrated in FIGS. 35 (c) and 36 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, in the operation element 3800 in the third embodiment, the guide groove 3870 is formed in a Z-shape in a side view. That is, in the side view shown in FIG. 35A, the guide groove 3870 extends from the entrance on the lower surface side of the main body 810 toward the upper surface of the main body 810, and then is folded back toward the lower surface. At the same time, it is folded again toward the upper surface side to be formed.

  As shown in FIG. 35A, in the normal state, the urging force of the flip-up direction urging spring 880 causes the held part 830 to rotate the held part 830 in the rotation shaft 700 in the normal state, as in the case of the second embodiment. 35 (a), the connecting shaft 990 is positioned at the end of the insertion hole 2820 on the held portion 830 side (the right side in FIG. 35 (a)). You. Therefore, in such a normal state, the position of the guide shaft 760 of the rotary shaft 700 is shifted with respect to the entrance of the guide groove 3870 of the operation element 3800, and the operation element 3800 is moved downward (in the direction of arrow G, FIG. 5B). See)).

  In the third embodiment, the operator 3800 is displaced horizontally (arrow B direction) in a direction away from the rotating shaft 700 (rightward in FIG. 35B) while being pushed down. That is, the player horizontally pulls the held portion 830 toward the player (on the player side) while pushing the held portion 830 downward. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the guide shaft 760 of the rotary shaft 700 is disposed immediately below the entrance of the guide groove 3870 of the operation element 3800, the guide shaft 760 is inserted into the guide groove 3870. As shown in FIGS. 35 (c) and 36 (a), the operating element 3800 is displaced downward (in the direction of the push-down operation) until the guide shaft 760 reaches the first folded portion of the guide groove 3870 as shown in FIGS. Is done.

  After the state shown in FIGS. 35 (c) and 36 (a) is formed, the operator 3800 is horizontally moved (in the direction of arrow B) in a direction away from the rotating shaft 700 (rightward in FIG. 36 (a)). Is further displaced. That is, the player further horizontally pulls the held portion 830 toward the player (toward the player). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 36B, the guide shaft 760 can be disposed at the second turn-down portion of the guide groove 3870, and as shown in FIG. It can be pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 5B).

  As described above, according to the handle device 3051 in the third embodiment, the operation element 3800 is displaced in the horizontal direction a plurality of times (specifically, twice) (that is, toward the front side of the held portion 830). In the case where the pulling operation is performed a plurality of times), it is possible to perform the pressing operation of the operating element 3800 to the specified position. Thereby, it is possible to more reliably prevent the operation element 3800 from being inadvertently pushed down.

  That is, even if the displacement of the operation element 3800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the near side) itself is an unintended operation that is not intended by the player, the operation element can be operated only by one operation. The push-down operation to the specified position of 3800 is not completed, and furthermore, from that state, the displacement of the operating element 3800 in the horizontal direction (pulling operation toward the near side) needs to be performed again. Therefore, since the second horizontal displacement needs to be consciously performed by the player, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from inadvertently performing an undesired pressing operation.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching of whether or not the interlocking displacement unit 900 is interlocked with the sliding displacement of the operation element 800 is performed by a downward operation of the operation element 800. In the embodiment, the switching is performed by the displacement of the operation element 4800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the player). Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 37A and 37B are partial cross-sectional side views of an operator 4800 and a rotating shaft 700 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 37A shows a state in which the operator 4800 is at an initial position. FIG. 37B corresponds to a state in which the operation element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (pulling operation toward the player).

  As shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, the operation element 4800 in the fourth embodiment is connected to the rotation shaft 700 via a connection shaft 4990. As a result, similarly to the first embodiment, the operation element 4800 rotates integrally with the rotation shaft 700 around the axis of the rotation shaft 700 to thereby slide in the sliding direction (the arrow I and the arrow I). While the displacement (slide operation) in the direction D (see FIG. 5A) is possible, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (the direction toward the player). (Pulling operation) is possible.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 37A, in the normal state, the operating force of the flip-up biasing spring 880 causes the operating member 4800 to move the held portion 830 closer to the rotating shaft 700 (see FIG. a) (left direction), and by displacing the held portion 830 horizontally in the direction of arrow B (pulling the player side) against the biasing force, the holding portion 830 is moved toward the player side as shown in FIG. ). In this state, when the operation force in the direction of arrow B is relaxed, the operation element 4800 is displaced horizontally in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow B by the elastic recovery force of the spring 880 in the flip-up direction. The state is returned to the state shown in a).

  In the first embodiment, the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 800 are connected by one connecting shaft 990. However, the rotating shaft 700 and the operating element 4800 of the fourth embodiment are connected by two connecting shafts 4990. Are linked by That is, one connection shaft 4990 of the two connection shafts 4990 connects one leg portion 812 of the pair of leg portions 812 and one insertion hole 720 of the rotation shaft portion 700, and the other. The connecting shaft 4990 connects the other leg 812 of the pair of legs 812 to the other through hole 720 of the rotating shaft 700. Accordingly, a space for moving the cam member 860 is secured between the two connection shafts 4990.

  FIG. 38 (a) is a side view of the operation element 4800, and FIG. 38 (b) is a top view of the operation element 4800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38 (a). 39A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator 4800 taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38B, and FIG. 39B is a manipulator 4800 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 38B. It is the elements on larger scale sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the operation element 4800 according to the fourth embodiment, the insertion holes 4820 formed in the pair of legs 812 of the main body 810 are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body 810 (see FIG. a) A left and right direction) is formed in a long hole shape having a major axis direction. It should be noted that the insertion hole 4820 has a short diameter (a vertical dimension in FIG. 38A) slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 4990, and the connection shaft 4990 can be displaced along the long diameter direction of the insertion hole 4820. You. The connecting shaft 4990 is fixed to the insertion hole 720 of the rotating shaft 700.

  The cam member 4860 is a member for pushing up the push-up member 410 upward (see FIG. 37). The cam member 4860 is a flat plate-shaped bridge portion 4861 bridged between the pair of legs 812 and the bridge portion 4861. A push-up cam 4862 extending from the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 38B) toward the base 811 side (that is, the side where the rotating shaft 700 is disposed, the right side in FIG. 38B); These are integrally formed.

  The push-up cam 4862 is formed in a triangular shape in a sectional view, and is disposed with a triangular top portion facing upward as shown in FIG. In a state where the rotating shaft 700 is connected to the main body 810 (between the pair of legs 812) via the connecting shaft 4990, the push-up cam 4862 has the triangular top formed by the rotation shaft of the push-up member 410 ( The protrusion 731 and the concave portion 411 (see FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (c)) are disposed at positions that support the rear surface, which is the lower side in the vertical direction, from below (see FIG. 37 (a)).

  When the operation member 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B, see FIG. 37A), the cam member 4860 pushes up the triangular top (the upper side in FIG. 39A) of the push-up cam 4862. 37, while being displaced in the horizontal direction while being in contact with the rear surface of the push-up member 410, the push-up member 410 is pushed upward (see FIGS. 37A and 37B).

  In this manner, the push-up cam 4862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross-section, and the top is used to push up the push-up member 410, so that the operator 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (arrow B direction). In a normal state (see FIG. 37 (a)), the push-up member 410 can be arranged further downward, and the size in the overall height direction (axial direction, FIG. 37 (a) vertical direction) can be reduced. When the operation element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (pulling operation toward the front side) (see FIG. 37B), an upward pushing amount of the push-up member 410 can be secured, so that the operation element 4800 is required. In addition, the operability can be improved by reducing the amount of displacement in the horizontal direction, and the up / down stroke of the lifting / lowering member 420 (see FIG. 19) can be increased so that the interlocking / non-interlocking Off It can be performed instead reliably (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, the lifting member 420 is moved to the first position (interlocking position) or the second position (separation position) by the displacement of the operation element 4800 in the horizontal direction (pulling operation toward the near side). The structure for switching to is described.

  40 to 42 are cross-sectional views of the handle device 4051. FIG. 40 corresponds to a state in which the elevating member 420 is arranged at the first position (interlocking position), and FIG. 42 shows a state in which the elevating member 420 is arranged at the second position (interlocking position) (non-interlocking state). ). FIG. 41 corresponds to a state in which the operating element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the near side) and the elevating member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position.

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the elevating member 420 is located at the first position (interlocking position), the interlocking displacement unit 900 can be displaced in conjunction with the sliding operation of the operation element 4800. In this state, when the operation element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the front side), the push-up cam 4862 of the cam member 4860 is moved via the push-up member 410 as shown in FIG. The lifting member 420 is pushed upward, and the lifting member 420 is disposed at an intermediate position.

  When the player looses the operation force from the state shown in FIG. 41 and the displacement of the operation element 4800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the front side) is released, the operation element 4800 jumps up. With the urging force of the urging spring 880, it is pulled back in the direction opposite to the arrow B direction, and the elevating member 420 is pushed down by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970. As a result, as shown in FIG. 42, the elevating member 420 is located at the second position (separation position).

  In the state shown in FIG. 42, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the sliding operation of the operation element 4800, the step surface 911c of the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the step surface 711c of the rotating shaft unit 700, and the interlocking displacement with the rotating shaft unit 700 is performed. Since the part 900 is disengaged, the interlocking displacement part 900 is not displaced even if the operator 4800 is slid. That is, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is separated from the operator 4800, and is fixed (maintained) at the separated position.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, the operation element 4800 is displaced in the horizontal direction (arrow B direction) (pulling operation toward the player side) from the state in which the elevating member 420 is disposed at the second position (separation position). Then, as shown in FIG. 41, the push-up cam 4862 of the cam member 4860 pushes the elevating member 420 upward through the pushing-up member 410, and the elevating member 420 is disposed at an intermediate position.

  In this state (ie, in a state where the elevating member 420 shown in FIG. 42 is arranged at the second position (separation position), the operating element 4800 is pulled toward the near side, and the elevating member 420 is arranged at the intermediate position). Then, when the player looses the operating force and the displacement of the operation element 4800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the front side) is released, the operation element 4800 raises the spring 880 With the urging force, the lifting member 420 is pulled back in the direction opposite to the arrow B direction, and the lifting member 420 is pushed down by the urging force of the pressing direction urging spring 970. As a result, as shown in FIG. 40, the lifting member 420 is disposed at the first position (interlocking position).

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the interlocking displacement unit 900 is interlocked with the sliding displacement of the operator 4800 by the displacement of the operator 4800 in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow B) (pulling operation toward the front side). Can be switched. That is, an operation for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball and an operation for fixing the interlocking displacement unit 900 to a predetermined displacement position (to store the displacement position) are performed by holding the held unit 830. It is not necessary to re-grip the finger or perform the button operation with the opposite hand, and the operation can be easily performed with one hand while maintaining the state of holding the held portion 830 of the operation element 4800.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. 43 (a) is a top view of the handle device 5051 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 43 (b) is a side view of the handle device 5051 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIIIb in FIG. 43 (a). FIG. 44 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 5051.

  In the first embodiment, a rod-shaped held portion 830 is formed on an operating element 800 for adjusting the firing intensity of a game ball by changing the slide displacement amount, and the operated element 830 is gripped by a hand to operate the operating element 800. Although the case of performing the sliding operation or the pushing-down operation of the above has been described, the operating element 5800 in the fifth embodiment includes the held portion 5800 on which the mounting surface 5831 is formed, and is provided on the mounting surface 5831 of the held portion 5800. A part of the hand is placed and a sliding operation or a pressing operation of the operation element 5800 is performed. That is, even when it is difficult to grip the operated portion 830 due to inconvenience of the hand, the sliding operation and the pressing operation can be performed, and the game can be performed.

  Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in each embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted. The handle device 5051 according to the fifth embodiment has the same other configuration as the handle device 51 according to the first embodiment except that the configuration of an operator 5800 is different from that of the operator 800 according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, in the operation element 5800 in the fifth embodiment, a held part 5830 is provided on the distal end side (the right side in FIG. 43A) of the main body part 810. The held portion 5830 is erected from a mounting surface 5831 formed by dividing an elliptical shape into two along its short axis in a top view, and an arc-shaped outer edge portion of the mounting surface 5831 in a top view. And an upright wall 5832.

  The placement surface 5831 is a flat surface on which the player places a part of the hand, and is formed as a flat surface parallel to the slide plane of the operation element 5800. By moving the hand placed on the placement surface 5831 in the horizontal direction, when the operator 5800 slides, the inner peripheral surface of the standing wall 5832 receives the hand in the horizontal direction.

  According to the handle device 5051 in the fifth embodiment, since the placement surface 5831 on which the player can place a part of the hand is formed on the held portion 5830 of the operation element 5800, for example, fingers are not Even if the player cannot freely hold the bar-shaped held portion 830 (see FIG. 5) because of freedom, the player can use the placing surface 5831 of the held portion 5830 to move the operating element 5800 in the left-right direction ( It is possible to perform a sliding operation in the directions of arrows I and D and a pressing operation downward (in the direction of arrow G).

  That is, in a conventional gaming machine that adjusts the firing strength of a game ball by gripping and rotating a rotating handle from the front, it is impossible for a player who has difficulty with fingers to play a game. Even when the held portion 800 is formed in a rod shape as in the embodiment, it is difficult to hold the held portion 830 and play a game. According to the present invention, a player who has difficulty in fingers can play a game for the first time by allowing the operator 5800 to be slidable left and right and pressed down.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration of one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  A game machine comprising an operation device operated by a player, wherein the firing intensity of a game ball is adjusted according to an operation amount of the operation device, wherein the operation device includes a held portion held by the player. An operator provided on one side and supported on the other side so that the held portion can be slidably displaced, wherein the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of slide displacement of the held portion, and A gaming machine A1 which is formed so that a player can recognize the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion with reference to the member (1).

  According to the gaming machine A1, the operator has the held portion held by the player on one side and the other side is supported so that the held portion can be slid and displaced. In other words, it is possible to improve the operability when adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. In this case, it is possible for the player to recognize the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion based on the predetermined member. Therefore, after the operation element is adjusted to the displacement position at which the emission intensity of the game ball becomes the desired emission intensity, for example, in order to interrupt the game, the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element is shifted to the initial position. When the player is returned, or, for example, when the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element is changed to the maximum displacement position in order to make a right-handed hit, the player may release the predetermined member. Based on the recognition of the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion as a reference, the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion is changed to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position before interrupting the game or right-handing). It can be adjusted (restored). Therefore, the operation of adjusting the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position can be performed accurately and quickly.

  Note that the held portion held by the player is not limited to a shape that the player can hold with his / her fingers. For example, a shape that allows the player to place the palm or back of the hand is exemplified. Examples of the structure that supports the other side of the operation element include a structure that rotatably supports the other side of the operation element and a structure that supports the other side of the operation element so as to be displaceable along the guide groove. . The structure for supporting the shaft is not limited to the structure for rotatably supporting only one shaft, and may be a structure for supporting the shaft movably (for example, a structure in which a spherical body is held by a spherical bearing). In the structure for supporting along the guide groove, the guide groove may be linear, may be curved, or may be a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operating device includes an interlocking displacement portion formed so as to be displaceable in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, and the interlocking displacement portion is configured to slide the interlocked displacement portion of the operation element A game machine A2, comprising: interlock canceling means for canceling displacement in conjunction with.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, it is possible to cancel the displacement of the interlocking displacement portion in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element by the interlocking release means. That is, the interlocking disengagement means releases the interlocking displacement unit from interlocking with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, thereby separating the interlocking displacement unit from the sliding displacement of the held element of the operation element. It can be kept (fixed) at the displaced position when separated. Thereby, in a state in which the operating element is adjusted to the displacement position at which the firing intensity of the game ball becomes the desired firing intensity, the interlocking disengagement unit releases the interlocking displacement unit so that the interlocking displacement unit remains at the predetermined displacement position ( Fixed), and can be used as a reference when adjusting (returning) the operation element to the original displacement position. Therefore, when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position, the adjustment operation can be performed accurately and quickly.

  In the gaming machine A2, the operator is supported on the other side, and is rotated about the supported other side, thereby causing the held player on one side to slide and displace. The interlocking displacement portion is configured to slide and displace one side by rotating the other side coaxially with the operation element and being rotated about the other side supported by the shaft, A gaming machine A3, wherein a movement trajectory of the interlocking displacement portion on the one side overlaps with a movement trajectory of the operation element in a top view.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the operator and the interlocking displacement portion are configured such that the other side thereof is coaxially supported and rotated about the other side so that one side is provided. The sliding trajectories on one side overlap in a top view, so that the player can easily grasp the relative positional relationship between these operators and the interlocking displacement unit.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a mark indicating a relative position between the operation element and the interlocking displacement section is provided on at least one of the operation element and the interlocking displacement section. A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a mark is formed on at least one of the operator and the interlocking displacement part, so that the displacement of the sliding displacement of the held part of the operator is provided. When adjusting the position to the original displacement position, a mark can be used as a reference. Therefore, the adjustment operation (return operation) of the operation element to the original displacement position can be performed accurately and promptly.

  In addition, a mark is formed on each of the operation element and the interlocking displacement section, and in a state in which the interlocking displacement section is displaced in conjunction with the slide displacement of the held section of the operation element, the mark of the operation element and the mark of the interlocking displacement section are provided. Are preferably the same. In this case, when adjusting (returning) the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position, the mark of the operation element may be made to coincide with the mark of the interlocking displacement section. The adjustment operation to the original displacement position can be performed accurately and quickly.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, one of the operation element and the interlocking displacement section includes an engaged portion, and the other of the operation element and the interlocking displacement section can engage with the engaged section. An engaging portion, wherein the engaged portion and the engaging portion are engaged with each other, so that the interlocking displacement portion can be displaced in conjunction with a sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, and A gaming machine A5, wherein the engagement between the engaged portion and the engaging portion can be released by the interlocking release means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the interlocking displacing portion causes the sliding displacement of the retained portion of the operation element by the engagement between the engaged portion and the engaging portion. In this case, the displacement of the interlocking displacement portion is caused by slippage compared to the case where the interlocking displacement portion is displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element by, for example, a frictional force. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement of the interlocking displacement unit can accurately follow the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, the operation element is adjusted (returned) to the original displacement position based on the interlocking displacement unit. Can be adjusted to a more accurate displacement position.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game machine further includes a coupling member that couples the operation element and the interlocking displacement section, and the coupling member couples the operation element and the interlocking displacement section. A game machine A6 characterized in that the movable member can be displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion, and the coupling of the operating element and the coupled displacement portion by the coupling member can be released by the coupled release means. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the coupling member couples the operation element and the interlocking displacement section, so that the interlocking displacement section reduces the sliding displacement of the held section of the operation element. Since it is possible to be displaced in conjunction with each other, the displacement of the interlocking displacement portion due to slippage is smaller than that in the case where the interlocking displacement portion is displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operator, for example, by frictional force. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement of the interlocking displacement portion can accurately follow the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation member, more accurate adjustment of the operation member to the original displacement position based on the interlocking displacement portion is performed. It can be adjusted to a suitable displacement position.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the operation element is formed such that the held portion can be displaced in a second direction different from a direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, The interlock release means is formed so that the held portion of the operation element is displaced in the second direction, so that the interlocking displacement section can be released from being displaced in conjunction with the operation element. A gaming machine A7 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the held portion is displaced in the second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the gaming ball. Since the release is performed by the interlock release means, the release operation can be easily performed. That is, the player displaces the held portion of the operation element in the direction of the slide displacement, adjusts the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then moves the held portion in the second direction from that state. It is sufficient to perform an operation of displacing, and in order to release by the interlock release means, it is necessary to perform an operation of holding the held part and an operation of operating another operating means with a hand opposite to the hand that operates the held part. There is no. As a result, an operation (release operation) for performing release by the interlock release unit can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine A7, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction for displacing the held portion along a horizontal direction, and the second direction is a direction for lowering the held portion along a vertical direction. A gaming machine A8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the direction in which the held portion of the operation element is displaced is such that the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball is such that the held portion is in the horizontal direction. Since the second direction for releasing by the interlock release means is the direction of lowering the held portion along the vertical direction, the direction of the sliding displacement of the held portion is The operation for releasing by the interlock release means (release operation) can be easily performed while maintaining the operation amount (that is, suppressing the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement).

  That is, the player performs an operation of displacing the held portion of the operation element in the direction of the slide displacement, adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then displacing the held portion in the second direction. In this case, the held portion can be easily displaced in the second direction only by applying the weight of the hand to the held portion, or by simply turning the wrist downward. As a result, the operation for canceling by the interlock canceling unit while maintaining the operation amount of the held portion in the direction of the slide displacement (that is, suppressing the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement) ( Release operation) can be easily performed.

  Note that the direction of the slide displacement does not need to be parallel to the horizontal direction. That is, the expression that the direction of the slide displacement is along the horizontal direction means that a range of an inclination angle of ± 60 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction is an allowable range. That is, it is not necessary to be completely horizontal, and part or all of the trajectory of the slide displacement may be inclined downward or upward. Further, the slide displacement is not limited to the form in which the locus is linear, but includes a form in which all or a part of the locus is curved in an arc shape. If the trajectory is curved in an arc, the tangential direction is the direction of the slide displacement.

  Here, in the gaming machine A7, the second direction is the direction along the horizontal direction and the front-rear direction of the gaming machine (that is, the direction in which the held portion of the operation element is directed from the front surface of the gaming machine to the player, or (A direction from the player toward the front of the gaming machine). According to this configuration, it is also possible to maintain the operation amount of the held portion in the direction of the slide displacement (that is, to suppress the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement) and to perform the release by the interlock release means. The operation (release operation) can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine A8, the release by the interlocking release means of the interlocking displacement portion being displaced in conjunction with the operation element is performed when the displacement of the held portion in the second direction is performed a plurality of times. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being performed.

  In the gaming machine A8, a second operation portion formed so as to be operable by a player is provided, and the disengagement of the interlocking displacing portion in conjunction with the operation element by the interlocking release means is released by the second operation portion. The gaming machine A10, which is carried out by operating the second operation portion or simultaneously with operating the second operation portion, by displacing the held portion in the second direction.

  In the gaming machine A8, the holding portion is formed so as to be displaceable in a third direction different from the second direction, and after being displaced in the third direction, the holding portion is moved in the second direction. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable.

  According to any one of the gaming machines A9 to A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the release by the interlocking release means of the displacement of the interlocking displacement unit in conjunction with the operating element is affected by the second direction. When the displacement of the holding portion is performed a plurality of times, when the held portion is displaced in the second direction after operating the second operation portion or simultaneously with the operation of the second operation portion, or in the third direction. Since this is performed when the held portion is displaced in the second direction after being displaced, the held portion of the operation element is inadvertently operated in the second direction, and the firing intensity differs from the intention of the player. In addition, it is possible to suppress the release by the interlock release unit. That is, since the second direction is a direction of descending along the vertical direction, as described above, it is easy to use the weight of the hand, and therefore, the operation of the held portion in the second direction is easy. On the other hand, where there is a possibility that the held portion may be inadvertently operated in the second direction, the displacement of the held portion in the second direction is performed a plurality of times as in any of the gaming machines A9 to A11. That the held portion is displaced in the second direction after operating the second operation portion or simultaneously with the operation of the second operation portion, or the held portion is displaced in the third direction after being displaced in the third direction. By displacing in the direction of 2, the inadvertent execution of the release by the interlock release means with a firing intensity different from the player's intention can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A8 to A11, when the held portion of the operation element is displaced in the second direction, the release by the interlock release means is performed, and the holding section of the operation element is moved by the slide. A gaming machine A12 formed so as to be able to regulate displacement in the direction of displacement.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A8 to A11, the held portion of the operation element is displaced in the second direction, so that the release by the interlock release means is performed, and the operation is performed. The movable portion is formed so as to be able to restrict the displacement of the held portion of the operator in the direction of the slide displacement. Restriction of displacement of the holding portion in the direction of slide displacement can also be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element from being shifted from the intended predetermined displacement position. As a result, it is possible to appropriately keep (fix) the interlocking displacement portion at the predetermined displacement position. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A12, the operation element is formed such that the held portion can be displaced in a second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, In a state in which the interlocking displacing portion is disengaged by the interlocking release means from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, the held portion of the operation element displaces in the second direction. The gaming machine A13, wherein the interlocking displacement portion is displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A12, the held portion is displaced in the second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. Since the return from the release by the interlock release means (return from the non-interlocking state to the interlocking state of the interlocking displacement with respect to the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element) is performed, such a returning operation can be easily performed. . That is, in order to return from the release by the interlock release unit (return operation), an operation of holding the held unit or an operation of operating another operation unit with a hand opposite to the hand that operates the held unit is performed. No need. As a result, an operation (return operation) for returning from the release by the interlock release unit can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine A13, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction for displacing the held portion in the horizontal direction, and the second direction is a direction for lowering the held portion in the vertical direction. A gaming machine A14 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A13, the direction in which the held portion of the operation element is displaced is such that the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball is such that the held portion is in the horizontal direction. Since the second direction for returning from the release by the interlock release means is the direction in which the held portion is lowered along the vertical direction, the direction from the release by the interlock release means is The operation for performing the return (return operation) can be easily performed. That is, the operation of displacing the held portion in the second direction can be easily performed only by applying the weight of the hand to the held portion or returning the wrist downward.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A14, the displacement of the interlocking displacing portion released from the interlocking disengaging means by the interlocking disengaging means is prevented from being displaced interlockingly with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operator. A gaming machine A15 characterized in that when the displaced position of the held portion approaches, the operation resistance when the held portion of the operation element is slid is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A14, the displacement of the interlocking displacing portion released by the interlocking disengaging means from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element is released. When the displacement position of the held portion of the operation element is close to the position, the operation resistance when the held portion of the operation element is slid is changed, so that the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element is changed. When adjusting the displacement position to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position of the interlocking displacement unit), even if the relative positional relationship between the interlocking displacement unit and the held portion of the operation element is not continuously observed, The player can recognize that the held portion of the operation element has approached the original displacement position based on the change in the operation resistance due to the slide displacement. Thus, it is possible to improve operability and reduce labor when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A15, a displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion released from being interlocked with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element by the interlocking release means is the interlocking displacement portion. A game machine A16 characterized in that, when the held portion of the operation element passes through the displacement position of the operation element, the operation resistance when the held element of the operation element is slid is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A15, the displacement of the interlocking displacing portion released by the interlocking disengaging means to be displaced in conjunction with the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element is released. When the held portion of the operation element passes through the displacement position of the interlocking displacement section with respect to the position, the operation resistance at the time of slidingly displacing the held portion of the operation element changes. When adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion), the relative positional relationship between the interlocking displacement portion and the held portion of the operation element must be continuously observed. However, the player can recognize that the held portion of the operation element has passed the original displacement position based on the change in the operation resistance due to the slide displacement. Thus, it is possible to improve operability and reduce labor when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position.

  In the gaming machine A16, the displacement of the held portion of the operation element relative to the displacement position of the interlocking displacement section released by the interlocking release means from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held section of the operation element. A change in the operation resistance when the held portion of the operation element is slid and displaced when the position is approached, and the change of the operation element when the held portion of the operation element passes the displacement position of the interlocking displacement section. A gaming machine A17, wherein a change in operation resistance when the held portion is slid is different.

  According to the gaming machine A17, the displacement of the operation element in the interlocking displacement section released by the interlocking release means is prevented from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held section of the operation element. It is assumed that the change in the operation resistance when the held portion approaches and the change in the operation resistance when the held portion of the operation element passes through the displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion are different from each other. Even if the relative positional relationship between the operator and the held part is not visually recognized, it is possible to determine whether the held part of the operation element has approached the original displacement position or has passed the original displacement position. Can be recognized. Thus, it is possible to improve operability and reduce labor when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position.

  Examples of the form in which the change in the operational feeling is different include, for example, a form in which the absolute value of the force required for the operation is different, a form in which the manner of change in the force required for the operation is different, and a form in which these forms are combined. You.

  Here, as a structure for forming a change in operation feeling, for example, one of a projection and a deformed body is provided on the operation element side, and a projection is formed on a member that is displaced relative to the operation element with the operation of the operation element. Or, the other of the deformed bodies is provided, and the deformable body is elastically deformed and returned to the initial shape by the operation of the operation element, by causing the deformable body to move over the projection, and the deformed body is deformed. A structure in which a change in operating force is formed by using a change in force is exemplified. According to this, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, as a structure for making a change in the operation force when approaching a predetermined position (a displacement position of the interlocking displacement portion) different from a change in the operation force when passing through the predetermined position, the deformable body is cantilevered. In addition to the rod-shaped body, the position of the rod-shaped body over the projection is made different (that is, a form in which the root side of the cantilevered rod-like body goes over the projection and a form in which the tip side of the rod-like body gets over the projection are formed). A structure that changes the change in force is exemplified. According to this, the change of the operating force can be made much different between the two, and the rod-shaped body can be used both when approaching and when passing, so that the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly and the product cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A17, the operation element is formed such that the held portion can be displaced in a second direction different from a direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, A gaming machine A18 wherein a predetermined operation is performed by displacing the held portion of the operation element in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A17, the player performs an operation for performing a predetermined operation (an operation of displacing the held portion of the operation element in the second direction). Can be easily performed while minimizing the change of the posture. Note that the predetermined operation includes, for example, stopping the launch of the game ball, changing (increase or decrease) the launch intensity of the game ball, and restricting the return of the operation element to the initial position (in the direction of the slide displacement of the held portion). Prohibition of displacement or suppression of displacement). In a gaming machine such as the gaming machine A3 having an interlocking displacement unit and an interlocking release unit, both the predetermined operation and the release by the interlocking release unit are performed by the displacement of the held portion in the second direction. It may be made to be done. In this case, two operations of an operation for performing a predetermined operation and an operation for performing release by the interlock release unit are performed simultaneously by one operation of displacing the held portion in the second direction. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A18, the held portion of the operation element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by a player.

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effect of the gaming machines A1 to A18, the held portion of the operation element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by the player, so that the held portion can be easily held. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when the held portion is operated in a predetermined direction (for example, the direction of the slide displacement or the second direction).

  In the gaming machine A19, the operation element includes a main body portion in which the held portion is connected to one side and the other side is slidably supported, and the held portion is vertically moved from one side of the main body portion. And the held portion is formed so as to be displaceable in a second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, A gaming machine wherein the direction of displacement is a direction for displacing the held portion along a horizontal direction, and the second direction is a direction for lowering the held portion along a vertical direction. A20.

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A19, the held portion is erected upward from one side of the main body in the vertical direction, so that the held portion is held in a natural posture by the player. The holding portion can be held (gripped), and the held portion can be easily operated in the horizontal direction of the sliding displacement and the vertical direction in the second direction. In particular, since the held portion is erected from one side of the main body portion, when gripping the held portion, the outer edge of the palm can be placed on the main body portion, thereby reducing fatigue. When displacing (falling) in the second direction, the weight of the hand can be applied to the main body, and the operation can be facilitated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, a button member which is pushed by a player to perform a predetermined operation is provided, and the button member is disposed on a held portion of the operation element. Gaming machine A21.

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, the gaming machine A21 includes a button member that is pushed by a player to perform a predetermined operation, and the button member is a held portion of the operator. Therefore, the operation for performing the predetermined operation (the pressing operation of the button member) can be easily performed while minimizing the change in the posture of the player. Note that the predetermined operation includes, for example, stopping the launch of the game ball, changing (increase or decrease) the launch intensity of the game ball, and restricting the return of the operation element to the initial position (in the direction of the slide displacement of the held portion). Prohibition of displacement or suppression of displacement).

  The gaming machine A22 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A21, wherein the held portion of the operation element includes a placing surface formed in a shape in which a player can place a part of a hand.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A21, the held portion of the operation element has a mounting surface formed in a shape that allows a player to place a part of a hand. With this arrangement, for example, even a player who cannot grip the operation portion can operate the held portion in the direction of sliding displacement by using the mounting surface of the held portion. That is, in the conventional gaming machine in which the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted by rotating the rotary handle, it is difficult for a player who cannot grasp the operation portion to play a game. By adopting a structure in which the holding part is formed so as to be slidable and the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of sliding displacement of the held part, it is possible for a player who cannot grasp the operation part to play for the first time. It has become.

  The gaming machine A23 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A22, wherein the held portion of the operation element is slid and displaced in a direction in which it is gradually lowered and inclined from an initial position.

  According to the gaming machine A23, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A22, the held portion of the operation element is slid in the direction of being gradually lowered and inclined from the initial position. The operation in the direction of increasing the amount (that is, the operation of increasing the firing intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed by using the weight of the hand. In addition, when the firing intensity of the game ball is kept constant, the weight of the hand can be used to counteract the urging force for returning the held portion of the operation element to the initial position, so that the fatigue of the player can be reduced. . Note that this configuration is used when the player needs to perform the slide displacement using the mounting surface of the held portion as in the gaming machine A21 (that is, when the player cannot grip the held portion). Especially effective.

  The gaming machine B1 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine B2 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the pachinko gaming machine has a handle device as a basic configuration, and fires a ball to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the handle device, and the ball is provided at an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

The gaming machine B3 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a handle rotating portion is rotatably attached to a handle base, and the firing intensity of a ball is adjusted in accordance with a rotating operation amount of the handle rotating portion. In addition, when the desired firing strength is obtained by the turning operation of the handle turning unit, the turning of the handle turning unit is fixed to maintain the firing intensity and reduce the fatigue of the player. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-005759).
An urging force by an urging spring is applied to the operation element (handle rotating portion), and when the player releases his / her hand, the operation position of the operation element returns to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when the game is interrupted, it is difficult to adjust the operation position of the operating element to the original operation position before the interruption of the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can easily adjust an operation position of an operation element to an original operation position.
<Means>
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes an operation device operated by a player, and the firing intensity of a game ball is adjusted according to an operation amount of the operation device. An operator having a held portion held by the one side and having the other side supported so that the held portion can be slidably displaced, and displaceable in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operator And an interlocking release unit configured to release the interlocking displacement unit from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held unit of the operation element, wherein the sliding displacement of the held unit is provided. The launching intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount, the player can recognize the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion based on the interlocking displacement portion, and the operating element is configured to launch the game ball. Said for adjusting the strength The held portion is formed so as to be displaceable in a second direction different from the direction of the ride displacement, and the interlocking release means is configured such that the held portion of the operation element is displaced in the second direction. The interlocking displacement portion is formed so as to be released from being interlocked with the operation element.
The gaming machine described in the technical concept 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1, wherein the direction of the slide displacement is a direction in which the held portion is displaced along a horizontal direction, and the second direction is This is a direction in which the held portion is lowered along the vertical direction.
The gaming machine according to the third technical concept is the gaming machine according to the second technical concept, wherein the holding unit is formed so as to be displaceable in a third direction that is different from the second direction. It is formed so that it can be displaced in the second direction after being displaced in the third direction.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operator has the held portion held by the player on one side and the other side is supported so that the held portion can be slid and displaced. It is possible to improve the operability of the held portion, that is, the operability when adjusting the firing strength of the game ball. In this case, the player can be made to recognize the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion based on the interlocking displacement portion. Therefore, after the operation element is adjusted to the displacement position at which the emission intensity of the game ball becomes the desired emission intensity, for example, in order to interrupt the game, the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element is shifted to the initial position. When the player is returned, or, for example, when the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element is changed to the maximum displacement position in order to make a right-handed hit, the player sets the interlocking displacement portion to Based on the recognition of the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion as a reference, the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion is changed to the original displacement position (that is, the displacement position before interrupting the game or right-handing). It can be adjusted (restored). Therefore, the operation of adjusting the displacement position of the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position can be performed accurately and quickly.
In this case, it is possible to cancel the displacement of the interlocking displacement unit in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element by the interlocking release unit. That is, the interlocking disengagement means releases the interlocking displacement unit from interlocking with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, thereby separating the interlocking displacement unit from the sliding displacement of the held element of the operation element. It can be kept (fixed) at the displaced position when separated. Thereby, in a state in which the operating element is adjusted to the displacement position at which the firing intensity of the game ball becomes the desired firing intensity, the interlocking disengagement unit releases the interlocking displacement unit so that the interlocking displacement unit remains at the predetermined displacement position ( Fixed), and can be used as a reference when adjusting (returning) the operation element to the original displacement position. Therefore, when adjusting the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element to the original displacement position, the adjustment operation can be performed accurately and quickly.
Further, since the held portion is displaced in the second direction different from the direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, the release by the interlock release means is performed, so that the release operation can be easily performed. It can be carried out. That is, the player displaces the held portion of the operation element in the direction of the slide displacement, adjusts the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then moves the held portion in the second direction from that state. It is sufficient to perform an operation of displacing, and in order to release by the interlock release means, it is necessary to perform an operation of holding the held part and an operation of operating another operating means with a hand opposite to the hand that operates the held part. There is no. As a result, an operation (release operation) for performing release by the interlock release unit can be easily performed.
Note that the held portion held by the player is not limited to a shape that the player can hold with his / her fingers. For example, a shape that allows the player to place the palm or back of the hand is exemplified. Examples of the structure that supports the other side of the operation element include a structure that rotatably supports the other side of the operation element and a structure that supports the other side of the operation element so as to be displaceable along the guide groove. . The structure for supporting the shaft is not limited to the structure for rotatably supporting only one shaft, and may be a structure for supporting the shaft movably (for example, a structure in which a spherical body is held by a spherical bearing). In the structure for supporting along the guide groove, the guide groove may be linear, may be curved, or may be a combination thereof.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the direction in which the held portion of the operation element is displaced is the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. Is the direction in which the held portion is displaced along the horizontal direction, and the second direction for releasing by the interlocking release means is the direction in which the held portion is lowered along the vertical direction. Operation (release operation) for releasing by the interlock release means while maintaining the operation amount of the held portion in the direction of the slide displacement (that is, suppressing the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement). Can be easily performed.
That is, the player performs an operation of displacing the held portion of the operation element in the direction of the slide displacement, adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then displacing the held portion in the second direction. In this case, the held portion can be easily displaced in the second direction only by applying the weight of the hand to the held portion, or by simply turning the wrist downward. As a result, the operation for canceling by the interlock canceling unit while maintaining the operation amount of the held portion in the direction of the slide displacement (that is, suppressing the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement) ( Release operation) can be easily performed.
Note that the direction of the slide displacement does not need to be parallel to the horizontal direction. That is, the expression that the direction of the slide displacement is along the horizontal direction means that a range of an inclination angle of ± 60 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction is an allowable range. That is, it is not necessary to be completely horizontal, and part or all of the trajectory of the slide displacement may be inclined downward or upward. Further, the slide displacement is not limited to the form in which the locus is linear, but includes a form in which all or a part of the locus is curved in an arc shape. If the trajectory is curved in an arc, the tangential direction is the direction of the slide displacement.
Here, in the technical idea 2, the second direction is the direction along the horizontal direction and the front-rear direction of the gaming machine (that is, the direction in which the held portion of the operation element is directed from the front surface of the gaming machine to the player, or (A direction from the player to the front of the gaming machine). According to this configuration, it is also possible to maintain the operation amount of the held portion in the direction of the slide displacement (that is, to suppress the shift of the operation position in the direction of the slide displacement) and to perform the release by the interlock release means. The operation (release operation) can be easily performed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the release by the interlocking releasing means of the displacement of the interlocking displacement portion in conjunction with the operation element is performed by the third mechanism. This is performed when the held portion is displaced in the second direction after being displaced in the direction of, so that the held portion of the operating element is inadvertently operated in the second direction, which is different from the intention of the player It is possible to prevent the release by the interlock release means from being executed at the firing intensity. That is, since the second direction is a direction of descending along the vertical direction, as described above, it is easy to use the weight of the hand, and therefore, the operation of the held portion in the second direction is easy. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the held portion may be inadvertently operated in the second direction, but the condition is that the held portion is displaced in the second direction after being displaced in the third direction. Thus, it is possible to effectively suppress the inadvertent execution of the release by the interlock release means at a firing intensity different from the player's intention.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
51, 2051, 3051, 4051, 5051 Handle device (operating device)
410 push-up member (part of fixing release means)
420 elevating member (part of fixing release means)
700 Rotating shaft part (part of operator)
711c Step surface (engaging portion or engaged portion, connecting member)
800, 2800, 3800, 4800, 5800 Operator 810 Main body part 830, 5830 Held part
860 cam member 5831 mounting surface 894 mark 900 interlocking displacement portion 911c step surface (engaged portion or engaging portion, coupling member)
950 pressing member (second member, part of fixing means)
970 pressing direction urging spring (first member, part of fixing means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine including an operation device operated by a player, the firing intensity of a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the operation device,
The operating device includes:
An operator having a held portion held by the player on one side and having the other side supported so that the held portion can be slidably displaced;
An interlocking displacement portion formed so as to be displaceable in conjunction with a slide displacement of the held portion of the operation element,
Interlock release means for releasing the interlocking displacement portion from being displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the held portion of the operation element, wherein the firing intensity of the game ball according to the amount of sliding displacement of the held portion Is adjusted so that a player can recognize the displacement position of the slide displacement of the held portion with reference to the interlocking displacement portion,
The operating element is formed such that the held portion can be displaced in a second direction different from a direction of the slide displacement for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball,
The interlock release means is formed so that the held portion of the operation element is displaced in the second direction, so that the interlocking displacement section can be released from being displaced in conjunction with the operation element. A gaming machine characterized by the following.   The direction of the slide displacement is a direction for displacing the held portion along a horizontal direction, and the second direction is a direction for lowering the held portion along a vertical direction. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   The holding portion is formed so as to be displaceable in a third direction different from the second direction, and is also displaceable in the second direction after being displaced in the third direction. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine is formed so as to:

Images